Project Manual Issue for Permit - Lundy Construction Offices [Project Manu… · Project Manual ELM Office Expansion and Upfit Issue for Permit August 19, 2016 W a r n e r N e a s

Project Manual

ELM Office Expansion and

Upfit

Issue for

Permit

August 19, 2016

W a r n e r N e a s e B o s t A r c h I t e c t s , I n c . , 5 1 7 D e l a w a r e , K a n s a s C I t y , M O 6 4 1 5 1 8 1 6 . 2 8 3 . 3 7 3 1

Project Elm – Office Expansion & Up-Fit Warner Nease Bost Architects, Inc.

Lewiston, Pennsylvania August 19, 2016

Table Of Contents 000100 - 1

SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 000101 - Project Title Page 000101.1-000101.2

SECTION 000107 - Seals Page 000107.1-000107.4

SECTION 000115 - List of Drawings Sheets 000115.1-000115.1

SECTION 024119 - Selective Demolition 024119.1-024119.8

SECTION 033000 - Cast-in-Place-Concrete 033000.1-033000.20

SECTION 051200 - Structural Steel Framing 051200.1-051200.12

SECTION 054000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing 054000.1-054000.12

SECTION 055000 - Metal Fabrications 055000.1-055000.8

SECTION 061000 - Rough Carpentry 061000.1-061000.8

SECTION 064023 - Interior Architectural Woodwork 064023.1-064023.6

SECTION 072100 - Thermal Insulation 072100.1-072100.4

SECTION 079200 - Joint Sealants 079200.1-079200.10

SECTION 081114 - Hardware 081114.1-081114.4

SECTION 081213 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081213.1-081213.8

SECTION 081416 - Flush Wood Doors 081416.1-081416.5

SECTION 083113 - Access Doors and Frames 083113.1-083113.5

SECTION 088300 - Mirrors 088300.1-088300.6

SECTION 092116.23 - Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies 092116.23.1-092116.23.4

SECTION 092216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing 099216.1-099216.8

SECTION 092900 - Gypsum Board 092900.1-092900.8

SECTION 093100 - Ceramic Tile 093100.1-093100.10

SECTION 095113 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings 095113.1-095113.8

SECTION 096513 - Resilient Base 096513.1-096513.6

SECTION 096813 - Tile Carpeting 096813.1-096813.5

SECTION 099123 - Interior Painting 099123.1-099123.11

SECTION 102113 - Toilet Compartments 102113.1-102113.6

SECTION 102800 - Toilet Accessories 102800.1-102800.4

SECTION 104413 - Fire Protection Cabinets 104413.1-104413.6

SECTION 104416 - Fire Extinguishers 104416.1-104416.4

SECTION 211310 - Fire Protection 211310.1-211310.5

SECTION 220229 - Valves for Plumbing Piping 220229.1-220229.2

SECTION 220510 - General Provisions 220510.1-220523.5

SECTION 220523 - Hangers and Supports 220523.1-220523.2

SECTION 220719 - Piping Insulation 220719.1-220719.3

SECTION 221116 - Pipe and Fittings 221116.1-221116.3

SECTION 223400 - Domestic Hot Water Heaters 223400.1-223410.1

SECTION 224310 - Plumbing Fixtures, Trim and Accessories 224310.1-224310.3

SECTION 230513 - Basic Mechanical Requirements 230513.1-230513.2

SECTION 230590 - Testing and Balancing 230590.1-230590.5

SECTION 230716 - Duct Systems Insulation 230716.1-230719.2

SECTION 230719 - HVAC Piping Insulation 230719.1-230719.4

SECTION 230900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900.1-230900.2

SECTION 232113 - Hydronic Piping 232113.1-232113.5

SECTION 233110 - Ductwork and Accessories 233110.1-233110.7

SECTION 233420 - Exhaust Fans 233420.1-233420.3

SECTION 233600 - Air Terminal Units 233600.1-233600.3

SECTION 237313 - Modular Indoor Central-Station Air Handling Units 237313.1-237313.8

SECTION 239500 - Project Close Out 239500.1-239500.2

SECTION 260000 - Electrical Table of Contents 260000.1-260000.1

SECTION 260100 - Electrical General 260100.1-260100.5

SECTION 260500 - Work in Existing Facilities 260500.1-260500.2

SECTION 261100 - Raceways 261100.1-261100.3

SECTION 261200 - Surface-Mounted Raceways, Boxes and Outlets 261200.1-261200.1

SECTION 261300 - Wire Mesh Cable Tray 261300.1-261300.2

SECTION 261500 - Outlet Boxes and Junction Boxes 261500.1-261500.2

SECTION 262500 - Grounding 262500.1-262500.2

SECTION 264100 - 600V Conductors 264100.1-264100.2

SECTION 264200 - Panelboards 264200.1-264200.3

SECTION 264300 - Disconnects & Separately-Mounted Circuit Breakers 264300.1-264300.2

Project Elm – Office Expansion & Up-Fit Warner Nease Bost Architects, Inc.


Table Of Contents 000100 - 2

SECTION 264400 - Transformers 264400.1-264400.2

SECTION 264600 - Switches and Receptacles 264600.1-264600.2

SECTION 264800 - Electrical Testing 264800.1-264800.4

SECTION 264900 - Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) 264900.1-264900.8

SECTION 265000 - Lighting 265000.1-265000.3

SECTION 265100 - Occupancy Sensors 265100.1-265100.2

SECTION 277120 - Fire Alarm System 277120.1-277120.3

SECTION 287830 - Cable Television System 287830.1-287830.1

SECTION 288000 - Telephone and Data Systems 288000.1-288000.2

SECTION 289200 - Access Control System 289200.1-289200.1

END OF INDEX

Project Elm - Office Expansion & Upfit Warner Nease Bost Architects, Inc.


PROJECT TITLE PAGE 000101 - 1

DOCUMENT 000101 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE

1.1 PROJECT MANUAL: Issue for Bidding

A. Project Elm – Office Expansion & Upfit

B. First Quality.

C. Lewiston, Pennsylvania

D. Architect Project No. 16007.00

E. Warner Nease Bost Architects, Inc.

F. 517 Delaware.

G. Kansas City, MO 64105.

H. Phone: 816-283-3731.

I. Fax: 816-283-3080.

J. Web Site: wnbarchitects.com.

K. Issued: Issue for pricing August 19, 2016

END OF DOCUMENT 000101



PROJECT TITLE PAGE 000101 - 2

Blank Page

Project Elm – Office Expansion & Upfit Warner Nease Bost Architects, Inc.


SEALS PAGE 000107 - 1

DOCUMENT 000107 - SEALS PAGE

1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD

A. Architect:

1. Dennis A. Nease.

2. Pennsylvania License No. RA-012780-B

3. Responsible for:

Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements 000101 Project Title Page

000107 Seals Page

Division 02–Existing Conditions 024119 Selective Demolition

Division 06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites 061000 Rough Carpentry

064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork

Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection 072100 Thermal Insulation

079200 Joint Sealants

Division 08 – Openings 083114 Hardware

081213 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

081416 Flush Wood Doors

083113 Access Doors and Frames

088300 Mirrors

Division 09 – Finishes 092116.23 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies

092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing

092900 Gypsum Board

093100 Ceramic Tile

095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings

096513 Resilient Base

096813 Tile Carpeting

099123 Interior Painting

Division 10 – Specialties

102113 Toilet Compartments

102800 Toilet Accessories

104413 Fire Protection Cabinets

104416 Fire Extinguishers

B. Structural Engineer:

1. Bart Jon Halverson

2. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Registered Professional Engineer No. PE080960

3. Responsible for:

Division 03–Concrete 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete

Division 05 – Metals 051200 Structural Steel Framing

054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing

055000 Metal Fabrications




C. Plumbing Engineer:

1. Scott Corley Woods


3. Responsible for:

Division 22–Plumbing

220229 Valves for Plumbing Piping

220510 General Provisions

220523 Hangers and Supports

220719 Piping Insulation

221116 Pipe and Fittings

223400 Domestic Hot Water Heaters

224310 Plumbing Fixtures, Trim and Accessories

D. HVAC Engineer:



3. Responsible for:

Division 23–Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning

230513 Basic Mechanical Requirements

230590 Testing and Balancing

230716 Duct Systems Insulation

230719 HVAC Piping Insulation

230900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC

232113 Hydroponic Piping

233110 Ductwork and Accessories

233420 Exhaust Fans

233600 Air Terminal Units

237313 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air Handling Units

239500 Project Close Out

E. Electrical Engineer:

1. Charles Nicholas Ingram

2. Commonwealth Pennsylvania, Registered Professional Engineer No. 84244

3. Responsible for:

Division 26–Electrical

260000 Electrical Table of Contents

260100 Electrical General

260500 Work in Existing Facilities

261100 Raceways

261200 Surface-Mounted Raceways, Boxes and Outlets

261300 Wire Mesh Cable Tray

261500 Outlet Boxes and Junction Boxes

262500 Grounding

264100 600V Conductors

264200 Panelboards




264300 Disconnects & Separately-Mounted Circuit Breakers

264400 Transformers

264600 Switches and Receptacles

264800 Electrical Testing

264900 Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)

265000 Lighting

265100 Occupancy Sensors

277120 Fire Alarm Systems

287630 Cable Television System

288000 Telephone and Data Systems

289200 Access Control System

F. Fire Protection Systems



3. Responsible for:

Division 21- Fire Protection Systems

211310 Fire Protection





Blank Page



LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 000115 - 1

DOCUMENT 000115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS

A. List of Drawings is provided on the Enumeration of Drawings sheet and includes issue

date. Contractors shall verify all sheets are available as indicated in Enumeration of

Drawings. Contact Architect if missing any Drawings.

B. Bidders shall use complete sets of bidding documents in preparing Bids; neither the

Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility of errors or misinterpretations results from

the use of partial or incomplete sets of bidding documents.

C. Bidders shall review addition design documents provided by Jacobs Engineering. These

documents will be provided by First Quality.




SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including First Quality General and

Supplementary Conditions and Request for Proposal documents, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade

improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless

indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent

damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall

where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and

that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and

reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site per First Quality requirements.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.




2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid

delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed

by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

6. Review proposed temporary screening, dust protection and security requirements with

First Quality.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures

proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control, for noise control and security.

Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending

dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.

Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as

far as practical.

C. Notify Architect and First Quality Project Manager of discrepancies between existing

conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the

Work.

1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate

contract.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition

operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not

guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of

selective demolition required.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.

Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Perform a survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might

result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent

structures during selective building demolition operations.

F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction

photographs.

G. Drawings represent approximate locations of known under slab utilities. Contractor shall verify

prior to any work.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.

3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.




4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC

systems, equipment, and components indicated or required to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap

or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same

or compatible piping material.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and

make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible

ductwork material.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with existing building operations roads, streets,

walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and

to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of

existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage

and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are

exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required

to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes

to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction

being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.




3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of

governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and

chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to

remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden

space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-

suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Maintain strict compliance with all

applicable safety regulations including those imposed by First Quality.

4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.

6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials

necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect or Owner, items may be removed to a

suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in

their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.




3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at

least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from

reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove

remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. Grind or “Stone” exposed

corners to ease all edges.

B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain

and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,

using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and

remove.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or

otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project

site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.

3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. Existing Construction to Be Removed: Coordinate all demolition including saw cutting and

other noise and dust generating activities with owner prior to starting.

B. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged: Refer to Drawings.

C. Existing Items to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Refer to Drawings.




END OF SECTION 024119




Blank Page



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings.

2. Slabs-on-grade.

B. This Project’s Scope of Work may include concrete work adjacent to recent work by others.

This Scope of Work shall include all means and methods necessary to attach or transition to

adjacent materials or surfaces. All new concrete work shall protect existing conditions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: fly ash; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances

warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,

and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect or First Quality

Project Manager.




E. Samples: For vapor retarder.


A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Form materials and form-release agents.

4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

5. Waterstops.

6. Curing compounds.

7. Floor and slab treatments.

8. Bonding agents.

9. Adhesives.

10. Vapor retarders.

11. Semirigid joint filler.

12. Joint-filler strips.

13. Repair materials.

B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance

with requirements:

1. Aggregates.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Minutes of preinstallation conference.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as

ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified

Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and

equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete

Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, as provided by Owner, qualified

according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.




D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from

single source from single manufacturer.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract

Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete,"

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as indicated by First Quality

Project Manager.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each

entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.

c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

d. Concrete subcontractor.

e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality

control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,

curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,

semirigid joint fillers, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device

installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and

levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and

damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. Store all materials in location

acceptable to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.




1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of

concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane

of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in

diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing

or waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-

drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to

length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel

wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater

compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated

wire bar supports.

3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar

supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and

source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.




B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide

aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years'

satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and

cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with

other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those

permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium

chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive

or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400.

b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 10.

c. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 10.

d. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 10 mil.

e. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 10.

f. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 10 mil Green.

g. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 10 mil Class A.

B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448,

Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a

No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

C. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and

manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5-

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1166&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456816737&mf=&src=wd










mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing

No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine

aggregates.

2.7 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS

2.8 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. VOC Content: Liquid floor treatments shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.9 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, certified by manufacturer not to

interfere with bonding of floor covering, available products that may be incorporated into

the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.

c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm.

d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.

e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).

f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.

g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.

h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid.

i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.

j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.

k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.

l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.

m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.

n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.

o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film.

p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.

q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.

r. Unitex; PRO-FILM.

s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.
























E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, certified by manufacturer not to

interfere with bonding of floor covering, provide the following available products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200.

c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.

d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure.

e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).

f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB.

g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX;

TAMMSCURE WB 30C.

h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.

i. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR.

j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.

k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR.

l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E.

m. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin.

n. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear.

o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear.

p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB.

q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.

r. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18

to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere

with bonding of floor covering.



a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal W.

b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.

c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; High Seal.

d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-19).

e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II 20 Percent.

f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Diamond Clear VOX;

Clearseal WB STD.

g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureCure Emulsion.

h. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20.

i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB.

j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20.

k. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 0800.

l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 200E.

m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E.

n. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 0800.





































2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or

less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or

styrene butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing

and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit

requirements, and as follows:

1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet.

Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match

adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement

as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,

and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as

recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface

to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement

as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and

application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as

recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.




2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent in footings only.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of

cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as

required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial

slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a

water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

B. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."




2.15 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32

deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2

minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of

batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds

for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project

identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount

of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure

can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide

top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

E. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed

strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.




F. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork

is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent

loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

G. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

H. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete.

I. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

J. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and

Bridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face

of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and

other conditions.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does

not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50

deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be

damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be

maintained.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply

new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces

unless approved by Architect.

3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to

ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.




1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

2. Bond to any exposed existing vapor retarders.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld

crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps

of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations

indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through

sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as required. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

3. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened

or partially hardened concrete surfaces. Where indicated on the Drawings.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-

fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing

each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints

after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete

when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before

concrete develops random contraction cracks.




D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and

other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch

(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is

required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate

or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of

weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.

Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6

inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of

concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration

to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and

other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.




3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low

temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)

for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the

temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on

frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled

mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water

equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to

cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits

on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent

unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by

hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of

trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that

would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.




1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or

quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating

system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155

(ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 20; and of levelness, F(L) 17.

b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-

grade.

3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and

placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).

C. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry

tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly

scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in

place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-

place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to

complete the Work.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather

protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and

during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the

remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:




1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at

least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less

than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover

material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with

bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall

within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair

damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound

manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere

with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial

application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity

of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.12 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has

permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact

faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in

formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.




3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and

replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two

and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water

for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.




1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19

mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,

and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching

mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone

plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and

standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding

color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match

before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher

than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and

verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces

sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or

that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of

width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired

areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.

Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges

to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low

areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent

floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level

surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in

diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with

clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)

clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and

apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original

concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with

adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching

mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,

and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to

match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and

patching mortar.




F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's

approval.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and

inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and

inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Headed bolts and studs.

3. Verification of use of required design mixture.

4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for

each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m)

or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,

but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional

tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;

ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test

for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is

40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test

for each composite sample.

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test

for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture.

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample.




8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one laboratory-cured specimen at

7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures

for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by

more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain

Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete

testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive

strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking

strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of

concrete.

13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency

may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with

ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply

with the Contract Documents.

3.15 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction

period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in

writing by liquid floor treatments installer.




STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

00100

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.

2. Grout.


1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional

requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.

2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to

structural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as

structural steel.

3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface-preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in

AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or

along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and

their connections.

C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows:

1. Shapes included in ASTM A 6/A 6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

2. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 2 inches (50 mm).

3. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches (50 mm).

D. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected

Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are

limited.




E. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant

degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and which are

indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint

and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats

are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction

without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and

directions for installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Include embedment Drawings.

3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed

and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

5. Identify members and connections of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System.

6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones.

7. Identify demand critical welds.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs):

Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded

joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage).

2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer fabricator shop-painting applicators testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.




E. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.

2. Direct-tension indicators.

3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.

4. Shop primers.

5. Nonshrink grout.

F. Survey of existing conditions.

G. Source quality-control reports.

H. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification

Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector.

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1

Endorsement P2 Endorsement P3 or to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating

Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.

2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.

3. AISC 360.

4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off

ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel

members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or

overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or

structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes

repackaging and seals containers.




2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents

to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator and comply with other information and

restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.

2. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level.

B. Construction: Shear wall system.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B or Grade C,

structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

1. Weight Class: As indicated on the Drawings.

2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex

steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-

steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with

plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8),

compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1,

heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-




hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel

washers.

1. Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating.

2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8),

compressible-washer type with mechanically deposited zinc coating finish.

C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-

hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-

steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

4. Finish: Plain.

E. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

3. Finish: Plain.

2.4 PRIMER

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product

requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California

Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile

Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

B. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior

Painting." Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." Section 099113 "Exterior Painting,"

Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type I Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

E. Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer.

F. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20 ASTM A 780/A 780M.




2.5 GROUT

A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, metallic

aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute

working time.

B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged,

nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency

suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according

to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.

3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected.

4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-

SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool

Cleaning."

F. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-

opening framing to be attached to structural-steel frame. Straighten as required to provide

uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld

exposed joints continuously, and grind smooth.

G. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame. Weld

exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure

removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than

10 inches (250 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to

pass through steel members.




1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes

or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to

steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances,

appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting

welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections.

4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).

5. Galvanized surfaces.

6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter,

slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."

4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

5. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning."

6. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

7. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning."

8. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning."

9. SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."




C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness

of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,

edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-

PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting

Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

2.9 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel

according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as

weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize lintels shelf angles and welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame

and located in exterior walls.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and

inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being

fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces

and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with

requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods,

bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and

elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural

steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in

intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,

connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-

place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to

AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces

of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface

of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before

packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.

Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with

manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for

Steel Buildings and Bridges."




D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before

permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in

permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for

discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be

enlarged to admit bolts.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances,

appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting

welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary

connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following

special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.

2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.

3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."




D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not

accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to

requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree

flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear

connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or

missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1

for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool

cleaning.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior

Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

D. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "High-

Performance Coatings."





Blank Page



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Load-bearing wall framing.

2. Roof rafter framing.

3. Ceiling joist framing.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.

2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-

stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site per First Quality requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing;

fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping,

bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining

work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing.

1. See Drawings for initial design minimums. Proposed changes or modifications shall be

included under delegated design requirements.





A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and

witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

1. Adhesive anchors.

2. Power-actuated anchors.

3. Mechanical fasteners.

4. Vertical deflection clips.

5. Horizontal drift deflection clips

6. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.


A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house

testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements,

including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical

requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other

damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.

2. California Expanded Metal Products Company.

3. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc.

4. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division.

5. Craco Mfg., Inc.

6. Custom Stud Inc.

7. Design Shapes in Steel.

8. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.

9. Formetal Co. Inc. (The).

10. MarinoWARE.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6242&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456828483&mf=04&src=wd









http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456828490~M.$M~MBA%20Building%20Supplies,%20Inc~$m~123456830648&mf=04&src=wd




11. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company.

12. Olmar Supply, Inc.

13. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc.

14. SCAFCO Corporation.

15. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.

16. State Building Products, Inc.

17. Steel Construction Systems.

18. Steel Network, Inc. (The).

19. Steel Structural Systems.

20. Steeler, Inc.

21. Super Stud Building Products, Inc.

22. Telling Industries, LLC.

23. United Metal Products, Inc.

24. United Steel Manufacturing.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing. For all framing revisions and

where framing is not specified on the Drawings.

B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design

loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated.

2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections

greater than the following:

a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall

height.

b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall

height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa).

c. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall

height.

d. Roof Rafter Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the horizontally projected

span for live loads.

e. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span for live loads and

1/240 for total loads of the span.

3. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction

tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as

follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:

1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.

2. Wall Studs: AISI S211.

3. Headers: AISI S212.

4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.


















D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply

with AISI S100 and AISI S200.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of

another qualified testing agency.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and

coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance.

2. Coating: G60 (Z180).

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of

grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance.

2. Coating: G60 (Z180).

2.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,

with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched,

with straight flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) Matching steel studs.


C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header

beams, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:



D. Steel Single- or Double-L Headers: Manufacturer's standard L-shapes used to form header

beams, of web depths indicated, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).

2. Top Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).




2.5 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING

A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with

stiffened flanges, and as follows:


2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum.

2.6 CEILING JOIST FRAMING

A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated,

unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:


2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum.

2.7 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural

Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise

indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing.

2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.

3. Web stiffeners.

4. Anchor clips.

5. End clips.

6. Foundation clips.

7. Gusset plates.

8. Stud kickers and knee braces.

9. Joist hangers and end closures.

10. Hole reinforcing plates.

11. Backer plates.

2.8 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to

ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-

steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by mechanically deposition according

to ASTM B 695, Class 50.

C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated

from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-

ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190

conducted by a qualified testing agency.




D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping,

steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout

containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and

plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid

consistency and 30-minute working time.

C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed

steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,

manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.

2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing

members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw

penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin

fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection

stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum

allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)

from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements

of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-

square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and

the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a

uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field

assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written

instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting

structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush,

even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between

fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and

complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track

or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in

intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,

undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent

connections to framing are secured.




G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame

both sides of joints. Provide detail information in sumital.

H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved

or standard punched openings.

I. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a

maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from

plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of

sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and

securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:

1. Anchor Spacing: As shown on Drawings.

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and

bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm).

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or

warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs

cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

E. Align floor and roof framing over studs according to AISI S200, Section C1. Where framing

cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting

structure as indicated.

G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as

indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to

supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated

on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads.

2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to

jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall

studs.

H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support

fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring

attachment to framing.




1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's

written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load

resulting from item supported.

I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically as indicated. Fasten at each stud

intersection.

1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched

studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing

members up to 6 inches (150 mm) deep.

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated

and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to

stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to

reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of

bracing and anchor to structure.

K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web

stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and

stable wall-framing system.

3.5 JOIST INSTALLATION

A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to

supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position,

brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.

1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38

mm).

2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers,

steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.

C. Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows:

1. Joist Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm Minimum or as indicated.

D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, or another

combination of connected joists if indicated.

E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located

directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as

indicated.

1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.




F. Install bridging at intervals indicated. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows:

1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist

webs.

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated

and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to

bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.

G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces,

clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete

and stable joist-framing assembly.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform

field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified

requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and

installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and

manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time

of Substantial Completion.





Blank Page



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.

2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels.

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated

to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves,

slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing."

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint

and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats

are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.

Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,

concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in

concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,

and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

Provide Shop Drawings for the following:




1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.

2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.


A. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with

ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.




F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm) or as required.

2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B structural

steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating.

G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless

otherwise indicated.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563

(ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being

fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

B. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the

load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in

concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified

independent testing agency.

C. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise

indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or

ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip

galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise

indicated.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal

and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.




E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by

manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

F. Concrete: For cast-in bollards, comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive

strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on

exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or

welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head

(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,

and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring

devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally

welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-

mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and

corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.




2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to

complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent

construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with

attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or

punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where

indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.

D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.

2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into

surrounding surface.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of

grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded

in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification

No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.




PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with

edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and

levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for

use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and

other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,

masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout,

concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.

2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,

including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders

with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of

pipe columns.




1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or

masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column

baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and

leveled.

3.3 INSTALLING PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS

A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC 360, "Specifications for Structural

Steel Buildings," and with requirements applicable to listing and labeling for fire-resistance

rating indicated.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.




ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

2. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension.

B. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

C. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5

inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.

D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.

2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.

3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.

4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.

5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.

6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate

type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include

physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent

testing agency.




3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before

and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent

testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of

treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of

treatment.


A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit

stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the

ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.

2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-

retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that

periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is

representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.

Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide

for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is

indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed

sizes for dry lumber.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.




2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior

construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in

contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board

of Review.

D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry

or concrete.

2. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior

masonry or concrete walls.

3. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in

crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.

4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with

requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-

test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test

method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread

index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant

progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame

front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time

during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where

exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry

plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing

agency.

E. Application: Treat.




1. Platform decking.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other

construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any

of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or

WWPA.

3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade;

NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber

of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will

interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to

eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots

capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated, in thickness

indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in

this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners compatible with all treated

wood components and assemblies.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.




C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);

with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed

in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete

as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and

inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and

ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or

A4).

EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and

fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.

Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for

attaching other construction. Coordinate with all other components requiring blocking, grounds

and similar support.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame

Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with

manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to metal studs or masonry; coordinate locations

with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood decking with

classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,

specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where

framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips

not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with

fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with




function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or

optimum joint arrangement.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated

and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other

work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces

unless otherwise indicated.





Blank Page



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1

SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Quartz Solid Surfacing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for

installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork

installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories.

B. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate,

solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories, handrail brackets.

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale

details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size.

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets soap

dispensers cable grommets and other items installed in architectural woodwork.

D. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Solid-surfacing materials.

2. Cable Grommet.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Quartz Solid Surface, 6 inches (150 mm) square.




2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.


A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with WI's "Manual of Millwork" for

grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and

other requirements.

B. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as required for complete

coordination with Project conditions, phasing, material storage, protection and for compliance

with all manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

C. Provide copy of all manufacturers’ standard completed warranty form.


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork

have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation

areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified

in "Project Conditions" Article.

B. Quartz Solid Surface shall observe all manufacturers’ recommendations and handle in a manner

to prevent breakage. Brace parts of necessary, Transport in the near vertical position with

finished face toward finished face. Do not allow finished surfaces to rub during shipping and

handling. Store between 25 and 130 degrees F. inside and away from exposure to direct

sunlight.

C. Do not install woodwork unless proper blocking and grounds are provided as required by these

Contract Documents, Project conditions and woodwork configurations as indicated on Shop

Drawings.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and

90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the

remainder of the construction period. Refer to and conform to manufacturer’s printed literature

for proper storage and environmental limitations.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with Project phasing and

construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.




1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related

units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be

supported and installed as indicated.

B. Coordinate with all adjacent materials providing for and accommodating for material

transitions.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall provide a two year warrant on complete installation of each product. Refer to

First Quality requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of WI's quality standard for each

type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Quartz Solid Surface: Homogeneous mixture containing 93% pure quartz with additions of

high performance polyester resin, pigments and special effects.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and color selection, provide

products equal to the following:

a. Ct – 1: Seacliff Edge 3cm “Cambria Waverton”

b. Ct – 2: Basin Edge 3cm “Cambria Minera”

c. Ct – 3: Seacliff Edge 3cm “Cambria Sheffield”

d. Ct – 4: Seacliff Edge 3cm “Cambria Preston”

2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated above. Color selection based upon the selected,

approved manufacture color sample on file. Manufacturer substitutions shall match

indicated color and be approved by Owner.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln

dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.

Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior

walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead

expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.




1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.

2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement or Contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.3 QUARTZ COUNTER TOPS

A. Thickness: 3cm.

B. Colors: Cambria Waverton, Cambria Minera, Cambria Sheffield, Cambria Preston.

C. Surface: Polished

D. Adhesive: Provide 50 year silicone or epoxy adhesive.

E. Joint sealant: Provide manufacturer’s recommended joint sealer. Color shall be matched or

clear.

F. Exposed Edges and Corners: Per Drawings.

G. Back and side splashes shall be sent to site loose for field installation and adjustment.

H. Field verify countertop dimensions for tight fitting installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and

complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of quarts solid surface components shall be performed by certified, trained

installers. This certification shall be in writing by the Manufacture of each product. All

products shall be carefully inspected prior to installation. Materials with imperfections, cracks,

stress marks or other faults will not be accepted.

B. Protect all installations from scratches. Apply masking where necessary. Take necessary

precautions to prevent dirt grit dust and debris from other trades contacting finished, installed

surfaces.




C. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes

with matching filler where exposed.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual

defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform

appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas.





Blank Page



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Glass-fiber blanket.

2. Glass-fiber board.

3. Mineral-wool blanket.




A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET

A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced Solind Attenuation Batts: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum

flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing

ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

B. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Reinforced-Foil Faced R-19: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced),

Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a

vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.




2.2 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS

A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced Solind attenliation batts: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets

without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-

developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for

combustion characteristics.

B. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Reinforced-Foil Faced R-19: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced),

Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84); Category 1

(membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.

2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of

holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place.

1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches

(50 mm) square.

2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in

diameter; length to suit depth of insulation.

B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting

spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-

locking washer in place.

1. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- (0.762-mm-) thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel

sheet with each leg 2 inches (50 mm) square.

2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in

diameter; length to suit depth of insulation.

C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick

galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold

insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in diameter.

1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to

ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:

a. Ceiling plenums.

D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to

substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread

and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.




B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier

materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without

damaging insulation and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections

capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,

rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill

voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,

and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or

required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following

requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If

more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a

snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not

rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic

spaces at vented eaves.

5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),

support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of

insulation to flanges of metal studs.




6. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and

seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.

a. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward finish goods warehouse side.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required

to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum

volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).

3.4 INSTALLATION OF REFLECTIVE INSULATION

A. Install sheet reflective insulation according to ASTM C 727.

B. Install sheet radiant barriers according to ASTM C 1744.

C. Install interior radiation control coating system according to ASTM C 1321.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and

other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse

and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after

installation.




JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Urethane joint sealants.

3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.

4. Butyl joint sealants.

5. Latex joint sealants.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site per First Quality requirements.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants

showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and

witnessed by a qualified testing agency.




C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.

B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the

testing indicated.

C. Mockups: Where requested by Owner, install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in

other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials

and installation methods specified in this Section.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-

sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less or greater than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer

for applications indicated.

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not

comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or

replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements

specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: As indicated by manufacturer’s standard warranty duration but no less

than 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from

the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.




3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing

system shall comply with the following:

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type

S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.



a. Dow Corning Corp.; 790.

b. GE Construction Sealants; SCS2700 SilPruf LM.

c. Pecora Corp.; 890.

d. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil WS-290, Sikasil WS-290 FPS.

e. Tremco; Spectrum 1.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, M, NS, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M,

Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT.



a. BASF Construction Chemicals; Sonalastic NP-2.

b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 505.

c. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 881.

d. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex - 2c NS EZ Mix.

e. Tremco; Vulkem 227.








2.4 IMMERSIBLE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Polysulfide, Immersible, M, NS, 25, T, I: Immersible, multicomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent

and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic-use, polysulfide joint sealant; ASTM C 920,

Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and I.



a. BASF Construction Chemicals; Sonalastic Polysulfide Sealant.

b. Pecora Corporation; Synthacalk GC-2+.

2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide

to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component,

nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing

silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.



a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786-M White.

b. GE Construction Sealants; SCS1700 Sanitary.

c. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; Bondaflex

Sil 100 WF.

d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.

2.6 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311.



a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300.

b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158.

2.7 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.



a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonolac.
















b. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.;

Bondaflex 600.

c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20.

d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); 850A.

e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.8 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants,

primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer

based on field experience and laboratory testing.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems.

b. Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco, Inc.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)

Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the

preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application

indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing

optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or

joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate

tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to

promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.










PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and

approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint

sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing

optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning

operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.

b. Masonry.

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint

sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.

b. Glass.

c. Porcelain enamel.

d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-

sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.




C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or

by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling

without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products

and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing

begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form

smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure

contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings, according to Figure 8B in

ASTM C 1193.

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on

Drawings, according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.





A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of

sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or one test

per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in

ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;

extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure

for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.

c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of

product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion

complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were

installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints

were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant

configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures

used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new

sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from

testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.

Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other

requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated

requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of

products in which joints occur.




3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances

and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without

deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage

or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants

immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between metal panels.

b. Perimeter joints of doors, windows and louvers.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT.

3. Joint Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior and interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.

b. Exterior and interior joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.

c. Control and expansion joints in exterior and interior unit masonry.

d. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems.

e. Joints between different materials listed above.

f. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, NS, 25, T, NT.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints between pool gutters and concrete slabs.

b. Control and expansion joints in pool deck.

c. Other similar joints in pool rooms.

2. Joint Sealant: Polysulfide, Immersible, M, NS, 25, T, I.


D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces

not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:




a. Control joints in drywall assemblies.

b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of doors, windows, and

elevator entrances.

c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.


E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.


2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.


F. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Aluminum thresholds.

b. Sill plates.


2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based.





HARDWARE

081114 - 1

SECTION 081114 – HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. First Quality is providing and installing all Security hardware as indicated by the First Quality

Door Detail Drawings Sheets as attached. Additional hardware and work shall be provided by

the Upfit contractor. The scope of work includes the following door type configurations:

A. DD-14, DD-19

B. Pass-2

Each door Door Detail Drawing Sheet includes the respective door hardware list showing what

is provided by PEB and what is provided by SEC (Security Door Scope of Work): This upfit

Scope of Work shall include all hardware, including installation, indicated as by PEB and as

designated on door schedule as upfit Scope of Work. Contractor shall include all labor and ma-

terials to install doors, frames and hardware for Upfit Scope of work. Contractor shall include

all necessary templates, rough-ins, knock-outs or other frame and door preparation as needed to

fully accept the entire hardware package. Contractor shall provide all electrical rough-in con-

duit and wiring as shown on the Door Detail Drawings. Low voltage wiring shall be by Securi-

ty Door Scope of Work.

Each completed door will be reviewed by contractor and Owner for compliance. Accepted

doors will be released, in writing, allowing the Security Scope of Work to proceed.

Contractor shall provide Shop Drawings that include differentiation of work provided by the

Upfit and work provide by the SEC Scopes of Work, for final review and approval by Owner.

Contractors are encouraged to observe on-site door mockup showing typical door configura-

tion.

The following pages include the Security/Surveillance & Door Finish Hardware Scope of Work

(Specification) as prepared by First Quality. This document, paired with the Drawings and the

Door Detail Drawings, also attached, provide the necessary information needed for this Upfit

Scope of Work.


Magnetic Locked Double Door

Card Access Both SideDD-14D

To ACP

Junction Box

PS120 VAC

To Fire System

SECURE SIDE (Interior)

MagLock MagLock

SECURE SIDE

Notes:· WALL KEY SWITCH WILL BE USED TO DISCONNECT POWER FROM THE MAGNETIC LOCKS FOR MAINTENANCE NEEDS OR IN INVENT OF ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

FAILURE. IN ADDITION WILL ALLOW HORN ALARMS TO BE SHUNTED DUE TO MAINTENANCE NEEDS>

· WALL KEY SWITCH WILL BE MONITORED FOR STATUS

· FORCED DOOR ALARM WILL SOUND AND REMAIN ON UNTIL DOOR IS CLOSED AND ALARM IS RESET BY VALID CARD(Proximity badge) READ

· DOOR PROPPED ALARM WILL SOUND AFTER 45 SECONDS AND WILL SILENCE AFTER DOOR IS CLOSED AND THE ALARM IS RESET BY VALID CARD(Proximity badge) READ.

· MAGNETIC LOCKS RELEASE ON FIRE ALARM EVENT OR THROUGH EMRGENCY PUSH BUTTON WHICH DOORS WILL REMAIN UNLOCKED UNTIL EITHER FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

HAS BEEN RESET (FIRE ALARM SYSTREM INITIAED) or IF EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON WAS USED THE BUTTON IS RESET.

· IF EMGERGENCY PUSH BUTTON IS ACTIVATED ALARM WILL BE INITIATED AND WILL NOT TURN OFF UNTIL BUTTON HAS BEEN RESET.

· MAGENTIC LOCK SHALL BE HAVE THE BOND SENSOR MONITORED FOR TAMPERING.

· HID READERS AND EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON WILL BE MONITORED FOR TAMPERING.

· MAGNETIC LOCKS WILL REQUIRE BATTERY BACK UP IN TH EVENT OF POWER LOSS AND MONTOREDFOR POWER AND BATTERY STATUS.

· IF ALARM IS ACTIVATED TO RESET DOOR MUST BE CLOSED AND A VALID CARD READ TO RESET HORN STROBE ALARM

· DOOR HEADERS SHALL BE RE_ENFORCED TO ENSURE INTEGRITY OF THE DOOR AND THE USE OF THE MAGNETIC LOCK AND DOOR CLOSURE.

HW SET: ALLEGION - DD-14D

6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652IVE

2 EA ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCK M380BDX-335 SEC

1 EA DUMMY TOUCH BAR 330 626VON

1 EA DUMMY TOUCH BAR 996L-DT 626VON

1 EA PSH BTN EXIT SS-24A0 STI

2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689LCN

2 EA WALL STOP WS406CCV 630IVE

2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRYIVE

2 EA CARD READER SE RP40 HID

1 EA HORN/STROBE CSH-1224W-BW POTTER

1 EA METAL COVER MX1550S HUB

1 EA KEYSWITCH 653-14 650SCE

1 EA PRIMUS CORE ONLY 20-740 626 SCH

1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091-36-079 025 626 SCH

MagLock MagLock

PUSH

TOEXIT

PUSH

TOEXIT

HORN STROBE

This Reader Releases Only this door path

HORN STROBE

This Reader releases Only this door path

Emergency Panic Button Releases Both Magnetic

Locks

ACP

Wireless Access Control Door DD-19

ACP

UNSECURE SIDE (exterior)

SECURE SIDE (Interior)

TOP VIEW

SECURE SIDE

UNSECURED SIDE

Notes:

Refer to the associated Architectural documentation for more information.

Contractor is to confirm wireless power is a feasible option to use and shall inform FQ to ensure capability

and cost are justifiable before purchase.

HW SET: DD-19

1 EA IN120 Lock Set IN120- EM01-IP-B-91 SARG

1 SET SEALS 303AS PEMKO

1 SET *WIRELESS POWER ICPT SECTRN

FQ WAP

Office Use

Functional Note:

FOR NEW DOOR INSTALLATIONS THE USE OF

WIRELESS POWER SHOULD BE CONSIDERED

WHERE POSSIBLE. IF NOT POSSIBLE TO PROVIDE

DIRECT POWER THE USE OF BATTIERIES SHALL BE

USED.

DOOR POSITION WILL BE MONITORED FOR OPEN

AND CLOSED STATUS

FORCED DOOR, UNKNOWN CARD, BATTERY AND

TAMPERING WILL BE MONITORED AND ALERT

EMAIL NOTIFICATION WILL BE COMMUNICATED TO

DEFEINED SUPPORT PERSONNEL.

12/24V Power or 6 “AA” Batteries

PS

12/24V Power or 6 “AA” Batteries

IN120 10 Line Series Cylindrical Locksets

Intelligent WiFi Access ControlCylindrical Locks

A. WiFi Access Control Cylindrical Locks to be 10-Line Series as manufactured by SARGENT Manufacturing of New Haven, CT.B. BHMA certified extra heavy duty, lever type cylindrical lock conforming to ANSI156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 standard and ANSI A117.1 accessibility guidelines.Motorized locking control of lever handle trim (solenoids not acceptable) with ½" anti-friction deadlocking latch, UL listed and labeled for up to 3 hour fire rated openings.1. Backset: 2-3/4 inchesC. WiFi access control locking devices interface using field replaceable IEEE802.11 b/g/n, 2.4 GHz wireless radio connection to an Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN) facilitating centralized control via a Software Development Kit (SDK). Locks will continue to operate independent of Ethernet (LAN) wireless connection slowdown or failure.1. Provide access control products with non-volatile memory.D. Supports WEP, WPA, WPA2 and 802.1x wireless encryption (IEEE 802.11 b/g/n, 2.4 GHz). AES 128 encrypted communication between IP Enabled lock and electronic access control system platform viaSDK. Programmable time zone periods, blocked holidays, automatic unlock with or without first entry, minimum of 2,400 user codes and the ability to audit the last 10,000 transactions (event type, date, time, user ID and name). Distributed intelligence allows stand alone functional operation of lock in absence of network communication or slowdown allowing for system operational redundancy.E. Integrated reader ISO 14443 A/B and ISO 15693 13.56 MHz contactless credentials: HID® iCLASS / iCLASSSE (full authentication, all formats), MIFARE Classic and DESFire EV1 (full authentication, all formats); NFC (Near Field Communications) and HID® SIO- Enabled™.1. Valid/ invalid credential presentation viewable by means of LED indicators on outside escutcheon.F. Environmental Conditions: Conformally coated weather resistant electronic controller shall meet the following minimum requirements:1. Operating temperature: -13°F (-25°C) to 151°F (66°C)2. Operating humidity: < 85% non-condensing3. Weatherized design suitable to withstand harsh environments with a certified rating of IP55G. Configuration: Programming of time zone periods, blocked holidays, automatic unlock with or without first entry, and listing 10,000 event transaction history consisting of event type, date, time, user ID and name is required.1. Provide network and lock configuration CD tool kit for initial lock set-up and programming via USB connection.H. Monitoring: Software accessible monitoring (via SDK) of inside lever handle (Request-to-Exit), door position switch (DPS) integral to the lock (door open/closed status), forced door, unknown card, door held open, battery and tamper.1. Standard privacy function initiated from push button on inside escutcheon and cancelled upon activation of valid Request-To-Exit (REX) or user defined credentials.a. Activation of privacy function is indicated by LED notification on inside escutcheon.b. Redundant actuation of privacy button does not deactivate privacy mode.I. Emergency override access capability by mechanical key cylinder retraction of lock latch bolt without electronic activation necessary.J. Inside lever retracts latch bolt.K. Power Source: Powered by 6 AA alkaline batteries with LED indication of locked, programming mode and low capacity warning status conditions.1. Optional hard power by means of 12-24 VDC power supply. (REVIEW POWER JUMP ICPT BELOW FOR USEAGE)L. Cylinders: Reference 2.04 Keying for keying requirements

POWERJUMP ICPT – Inductive Coupling Power TransferPRODUCT FEATURES• Transfers power wirelessly acrossdoor gaps of up to 3/16"• Flexible mounting: can beinstalled on hinge side, latchside or top of frame• Dual-voltage output 12 VDC or24 VDC field selectable• Continuous or intermittent duty• Recommended f or fail secure devices• Use with electrified locks, latches orother door hardware requiring up to6 watts (0.5A @12 VDC) of power• Adhesive backed templates foraccurate installation• MagnaCare® lifetime replacement,no fault warranty

SPECIFICATIONS• UL 10C Fire Rated, 3 hour• CAN4-S101 (ULC-S104)fire door conformant• ANSI/SDI-BHMA A250.13(+/- 150 psi) Windstorm Listed• FCC Part 15 compliant• Patent: 8,294,302Endurance:2,000,000 cyclesDimensions:Send Unit (Frame Side)2-3/4"H x 1-1/4"W x 1-3/8"DReceive Unit (Door Side)2-3/4"H x 1-1/4"W x 1-5/8"DElectrical:Input24 VDC only 500 mA maxOutput500 mA at 12 VDC250 mA at 24 VDCOperating Temperature:-40 to +120F [-40 to +49C]

Cylinder excepts Removable PRIMUS Core



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081213 - 1

SECTION 081213 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Steel doors and frames.

B. Steel window frames.

C. Steel doors and frames with transoms and side lights.

1.3 SUMMARY

First Quality is providing and installing all Security hardware as indicated by the First Quality Hardware

Configuration Sheets. Additional hardware and work shall be provided by the Upfit contractor. The

scope of work includes the following door type configurations:

A. DD-14, DD-19

B. Pass-2

This upfit Scope of Work shall include all hardware, including installation, as designated on door schedule.

Contractor shall include all labor and materials to install doors, frames and hardware for Upfit Scope of work.

Contractor shall include all necessary templates, rough-ins, knock-outs or other frame and door preparation as

needed to fully accept the entire hardware package. Contractor shall provide all electrical rough-in conduit

and wiring as shown on the Door Detail Drawings and as required.

Each completed door will be reviewed by contractor and Owner for compliance. Accepted doors will be

released, in writing, allowing the Security Scope of Work to proceed.

Contractors are encouraged to observe on-site door showing typical door configuration.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A115.1-A115.17 - Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware

B. ANSI A224.1 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for

Steel Doors and Frames.

C. ANSI/SDI 100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

D. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.




E. ASTM A366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality.

F. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.

G. ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial

Quality.

S. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute: Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware

for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

U. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; Metal Finishes

Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.

V. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.

W. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies.

X. Steel Door Institute - SDI 105: Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.

Y. SDI 107 - Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement - Application)

Z. SDI 112 - Galvanized Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

DD. SSPC-SP 1 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 1: Solvent Cleaning.

EE. SSPC-SP 5 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 5: White Metal Blast Cleaning.

FF. SSPC-SP 8 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 8: Pickling.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction,

materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles,

and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include

details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of

construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and

reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

Reference First Quality hardware configuration sheets.

C. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for

details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. Include reference to First Quality

hardware configuration sheets.

D. Indicate all special prep required for door hardware including security devices, indicate

coordinating door hardware set on shop drawings. Refer to First Quality hardware

configuration sheets and other First Quality provided requirements.





A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and

frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are

labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested

assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction that doors conform to all standard construction requirements of tested

and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Temperature-Rise Rating: In exit enclosures and where indicated, provide doors

that have a temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire

exposure.

3. Doors and Frames in Maximum Foreseeable Loss Walls and FM Approved Doors

shall be approved and installed per Factory Mutual requirements. Refer to Door

Schedule for other requirements.


A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit

and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-

finished doors and frames.

B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided

refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Project Manager or Architect;

otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch high

wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a

humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons

immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air

circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Steel Doors and Frames:

a. Amweld Building Products, Inc.

b. Ceco Door Products.




c. Curries Co.

d. Fenestra Corp.

e. Mesker Door, Inc.

f. Pioneer Industries.

g. Republic Builders Products.

h. Steelcraft.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial-quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled,

complying with ASTM A 569.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366, commercial quality,

or ASTM A 620, drawing quality, special killed.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526,

commercial quality, or ASTM A 642, drawing quality, hot-dip galvanized according to

ASTM A 525, with A 60 or G 60 coating designation, mill phosphatized.

D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478-inch thick steel sheet; 0.0516-

inch thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into

exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.

2.3 DOORS

A. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4 inch thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and

models specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules:

1. Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0478-

inch thick cold-rolled steel sheet faces.

B. Door Louvers: Provide louvers according to SDI 111C for interior doors where indicated,

with blades or baffles formed of 0.0239-inch thick cold-rolled steel sheet set into minimum

0.0359-inch thick steel frame.

1. Sight-Proof Louvers: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-

shaped blades.

2.4 FRAMES

A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings,

according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules.




Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 0.0598-inch

thick cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corner, continuously welded construction

for exterior applications and knocked down for field assembly at interior

applications.

B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike

jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames.

C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179-inch thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at

back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation

and to close off interior of openings. Coordinate with special door and frame hardware

requirements.

D. Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Section 04200, "Unit

Masonry."

E. Hollow metal frames shall not be foamed-in-place. All wiring shall be replaceable after

installation.

2.5 WINDOW FRAMES

A. Steel window frames; interior use; 16 gauge steel; 5 inch throat dimension unless shown

otherwise, with glazing stop. Provide in prepared can opening with 2 jamb anchors per

jamb.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects,

warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly

identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure

proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements.

1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials

according to SDI standards, fire rating requirements, and insulating requirements.

a. Resin - impregnated paper honeycomb.

b. Rigid polyurethane conforming to ASTM C 591.

c. Rigid mineral fiber with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets.

2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4

inch between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.

a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80.

b. Conform to all Factory Mutual requirements.




B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units,

from only cold-rolled steel sheet.

C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and

Frames."

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from

either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for

exposed screws and bolts.

F. Sound-Rated (Acoustical) Assemblies: Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame

assemblies fabricated as sound-reducing type, tested according to ASTM E1408, and

classified according to ASTM E413. Unless otherwise indicated, provide acoustical

assemblies with STC sound ratings of 33 or better.

G. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed

hardware according to final door hardware schedule, templates provided by hardware

supplier and per First Quality Hardware Configuration Sheets. Comply with applicable

requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame

preparation for hardware.

1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing, and

provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.

H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for

surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.

I. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door

and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

J. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359-inch thick steel or 0.04-inch thick aluminum.

1. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and

other panels in doors.

2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying

and designating finishes.

B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for steel sheet finishes.

C. Apply primers to doors and frames after fabrication.

2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES




A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil,

grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if

present, from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or

SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling).

B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type

suited to organic coating applied over it.

C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with

ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has

capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer

immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

D. Field-painted finish is specified in Section 09900, "Painting".

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to approved Shop Drawings,

manufacturer's data, and as specified.

B. All door frames shall be inspected, on site, by owner prior to installation. Each frame shall be

approved, in writing by owner prior to actual installation.




C. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames

accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.

After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces

smooth and undamaged.

1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly

construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings.

2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge

location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable

anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.

3. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening

anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding

heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts

and masonry anchorage devices.

4. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike

levels. In steel-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.

5. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

6. Coordinate all hardware imbeds, pig tails, leads and other security hardware

requirements with all other trades.

7. Prewired doors and frames shall not be foamed in-place. All wiring shall be

replaceable after installation.

D. Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in

ANSI/SDI 100.

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80.

2. Smoke-Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105.

3. Each Door shall be inspected and approved by First Quality prior to installation of

security hardware Scope of Work.

1. Unacceptable doors shall be immediately corrected to owner requirements.

2. Accepted doors will receive written confirmation of acceptance.


A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas

of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings

from doors and frames.


Project Elm - Expanision & Upfit Warner Nease Bost Architects, Inc.

Lewistown, Pennsylvania August 19, 2016

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL (FQ Specification)

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Solid core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces – Match existing, including finish,

color, etc.

B. Shop priming of flush wood doors where indicated for painted finish.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AWI: Architectural Woodwork Institute - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards,

Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program.

B. NWWDA I.S.1: National Wood Window and Door Manufacturers Association -

Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including details

of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,

elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware

blocking, requirements for finishing and other pertinent data.

C. Samples: Submit samples, 1-0" square or as indicated, for the following:

1. Doors for Transparent Finish: Door faces with solid wood edging representing

typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber

required.


A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards:

1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1 "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors", of

National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA).

2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"; including

Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors" of Architectural Woodwork Institute

(AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and other requirements

exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard.

B. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.




1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and

deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations

of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood

Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation

system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary,

removable or concealed markings.


A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative

humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas

during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements

applicable to project's geographical location:

1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3 "Moisture Content".

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the

Owner may have under the Contract Documents.

B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's

standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or

replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of

core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced

quality standards.

1. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of

Substantial Completion.

2. Solid Core Interior Doors:

a. Life of installation.

C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work

contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering doors which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

1. Solid Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces:




a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.

b. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division.

c. Weyerhauser Company.

2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS

A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish:

1. Faces: Natural birch, plain sliced.

2. AWI Grade: Custom.

3. Construction: 5 plies.

4. Core: Glued-block core.

5. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before

veneering.

B. Solid Core Doors for Opaque (Painted) Finish:

1. Faces: medium-density overlay over standard thickness hardwood face veneers.

2. Grade: Custom.

3. Construction: 5 plies.

4. Core: Glued-block core.

5. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planned before

veneering.

2.3 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES

A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid wood louvers, unless otherwise

indicated, and of size indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements:

1. In sizes indicated for job-site fitting or factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit

frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels:

a. Comply with clearance requirements of AWI for prefitting. For

premachining, comply with final hardware schedules and door frame

shop drawings and with hardware templates.




b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify

dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining.

B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements

of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.5 FINISHING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Match existing stain and finish.

A. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system,

staining effect and sheen.

1. AWI Grade: Custom.

2. Finish: AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.

3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.

4. Effect: Filled finish.

5. Sheen: Satin-medium rubbed effect.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door:

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,

and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level

heads.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation see Section 08700 - Finish Hardware.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's

instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated.

C. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as

indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or




permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after

fitting and machining.

D. Fitting Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, 1/16

inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top

of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide

1/4-inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.

1. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge

edges.

E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

F. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to Section 09900, "Painting", for finishing requirements.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.

C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be

without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for heating and air-conditioning duct access

doors.



1. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles,

and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.

C. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations,

sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to

access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the

following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically.




2. NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS



1. Access Panel Solutions.

2. Acudor Products, Inc.

3. Alfab, Inc.

4. Babcock-Davis.

5. Cendrex Inc.

6. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Co.; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co.

7. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC.

8. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.

9. Karp Associates, Inc.

10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

11. Maxam Metal Products Limited.

12. Metropolitan Door Industries Corp.

13. MIFAB, Inc.

14. Milcor Inc.

15. Nystrom, Inc.

16. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single

manufacturer.

C. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:

1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's

standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.

2. Locations: Wall and ceiling.

3. Door Size: As required for complete access.

4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage.

a. Finish: Factory prime paint to match adjacent finished material.

5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.

6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.

7. Hardware: Latch.

D. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges provided where exposed flanges access door not

compatible with installation or in gypsum wall assembly:

1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with gypsum

board beads for concealed flange installation.


3. Door Size: As required for complete access.






















5. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.


7. Hardware: Latch.

E. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:

1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber

insulation enclosed in sheet metal uninsulated. Provide self-latching door with automatic

closer and interior latch release. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange,

proportional to door size.


3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.





7. Hardware: Latch.

F. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:

1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber

insulation enclosed in sheet metal uninsulated. Provide self-latching door with automatic

closer and interior latch release. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for concealed

flange installation.


3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.





7. Hardware: Latch.

G. Hardware:

1. Latch: Cam latch operated by knurled knob or by hex-head wrench or by spanner-head

wrench with interior release.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel

sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.




C. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to

ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for

installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam

marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish

attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports

indicated.

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and

gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames.

2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.

D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish.

Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.

E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when

closed.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:

1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free,

universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.





Blank Page



MIRRORS 088300 - 1

SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:

1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision and spandrel

lites.



1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of

silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating

components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.

2. Mirror Mounting Clips: Include sample of CRL Polished chrome plastic lined mirror

mounting clips, manufacture’s written installation instructions, spacing requirements and

other supportive literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment

details.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.



MIRRORS 088300 - 2


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who

are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror

manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of mirror mastic

products and mirror backing matching those submitted.


A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent

damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or

other causes.

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling

mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass

surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity

conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified

warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that

are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to

manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of

the silver film.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company.





MIRRORS 088300 - 3

2. Binswanger Glass.

3. Donisi Mirror Company.

4. D & W Incorporated.

5. Gardner Glass Products, Inc.

6. Glasswerks LA, Inc.

7. Guardian Industries Corp.

8. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc.

9. Lenoir Mirror Company.

10. National Glass Industries.

11. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions.

12. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc.

13. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.

B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single

source.

2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating

process.

B. Annealed Monolithic Glass Mirrors: Mirror Glazing Quality, clear.

1. Nominal Thickness: As required for project applications.


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for

use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting

mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating

and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

D. Mirror Mounting Clips: Provide CRL polished chrome plastic lined mirror mounting clips

designed for and spaced as required by Project conditions.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate mirrors in the shop to greatest extent possible.

B. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and

size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.















MIRRORS 088300 - 4

C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished.

1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or

atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for

compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

B. Verify that all mastics are compatible and suitable for installation with mirrors.

C. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing

finishes or primers with mirror mastic.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces

are dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of

substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where

applicable.

B. Confirm substrate is compatible for Mirror Mounting Clips. Verify all blocking is in place as

required prior to installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with

referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids

distorting reflected images.

1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips

for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

B. Provide a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface

for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

C. Provide Mirror Mounting Clips designed for specific Project conditions. Locate and confirm all

substrate support, blocking, and grounds are suitable for installation of mirrors prior to

installation. Follow all manufacture’s guidelines.

D. Install mirrors with mastic.



MIRRORS 088300 - 5

1. Install mastic as follows:

a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers

of mirrors and backing material.

b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for

coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of

mounting surface.

c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a

minimum airspace of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting

surface.

d. Provide temporary shoring until mirror is safely and permanently attached.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations.

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.

C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from

condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections

that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by

mirror manufacturer.




MIRRORS 088300 - 6

Blank Page



GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 1

SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.


A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack

panels flat and support them on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with gypsum-shaftliner-board manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Do not install finish panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an


2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

A. Fire-Resistance Rating: [1 hour].

B. Gypsum Shaftliner Board:

1. Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels

with paper faces, 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick, with double beveled long edges.

C. Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing, General: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for

metal unless otherwise indicated and complying with requirements for fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated.

1. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) unless otherwise indicated.

D. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive, corner, and end members as follows:

1. Depth: As indicated.


E. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long-leg

length, but at least 2 inches (51 mm) long and matching studs in depth.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.

F. Finish Panels: Gypsum board as specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."

G. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Provide 1” sound attenuation brackets.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with shaft wall manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes as specified

in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly

manufacturer's written instructions for application indicated.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.




D. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading

conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track,

fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.

1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or

strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater

than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488/E 488M

conducted by a qualified testing agency.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,

fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated

according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by

testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

E. Reinforcing: Galvanized-steel reinforcing strips with 0.033-inch (0.84-mm) minimum thickness

of base metal (uncoated).

F. Acoustical Sealant: Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold

damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft wall assemblies so both

elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive

materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft wall assemblies to comply with

requirements specified in Section 078100 "Applied Fireproofing."

B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for

installation of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive

material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect

remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-

resistance-rated assemblies indicated and manufacturer's written installation instructions.




B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of

expansion joints with furring and other support.

C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings and as

required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment,

services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and similar items that cannot be

supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing.

1. Elevator Hoistway: At elevator hoistway-entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on

each side of door frame.

2. Reinforcing: Provide where items attach directly to shaft wall assembly as indicated on

Drawings; accurately position and secure behind at least one layer of face panel.

D. Penetrations: At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft wall assembly

by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection

behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons and floor indicators, and similar

items.

E. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels while

maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.

F. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated.

G. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings while maintaining fire-

resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.

H. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than

1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.



END OF SECTION 092116.23



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.


1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for interior load-bearing and exterior non-

load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless


2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless


B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and

runners.




1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required.

b. Depth: As required.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep

flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into

top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of

studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-)

deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer

runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in

thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.

2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track.

3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.

4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with

movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly

indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of

studs.



a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip.

b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.

c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

E. Flat Strap: Steel sheet bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness,

with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=226&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456814680&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd












1. Depth: As required.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-)

thick, galvanized steel.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.


2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum

1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm).

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall

attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45

mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-)

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching

wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that

imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an


C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in

diameter.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053

inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As required.

E. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system

composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.



a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.

b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.

c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.









A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel

stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,

cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building

structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that

hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in

advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,

grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.




3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to

terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above

ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished

assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install

runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in

finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to

match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to

underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-

rated assembly indicated.

E. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in

place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall

with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven

fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange

extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring

channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more

than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.




F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than

1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.

3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by

building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension

system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of

trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,

and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that

extend through forms.

5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems

meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other

and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3

mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely

between parallel members that will receive finishes.








Blank Page



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Tile backing panels.



1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack

panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold

damaged.


discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an


2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following

provide products by one of the following] available manufacturers offering products that may be


1. American Gypsum.

2. CertainTeed Corp.

3. Lafarge North America Inc.

4. National Gypsum Company.

5. PABCO Gypsum.

6. Temple-Inland.

7. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).

2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.

C. Gypsum Board, Moisture and Mold Resistant, ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.

2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-

resistive capability.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following provide one of

the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are

not limited to, the following:

a. American Gypsum; Firebloc Type C.

b. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Type C.















c. Lafarge North America Inc.; Firecheck Type C.

d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Fire-Shield C.

e. PABCO Gypsum; Flame Curb Type Super C.

f. Temple-Inland; Type TG-C.

g. USG Corporation; Firecode C Core.

2. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings.

3. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Gypsum Board Liner Panels: 1” panels ASTMC1396, as shown in drawings.

2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's

standard edges.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following provide one of

the following available products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are

not limited to, the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. (Coordinate with Tile Spec and TCNA)

2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

c. Expansion (control) joint.

2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer and as required by Tiling

Specifications and TCNA.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.











1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping drying-type, all-purpose

compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping drying-type, all-purpose

compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound

or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to

be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel

manufacturer.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum

panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. Non-corrosive fasteners where indicated in Tiling Specifications and as referenced in the

TCNA Manual.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer

present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.




B. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with

not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

C. Locate edge and end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.

Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control

joints at corners of framed openings.

D. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

E. Install gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), as indicated on drawings and in

schedules

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in

area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow

1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these

locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between

edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

G. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to

open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

2. Type C: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly, as indicated in

drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise

required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses

of panels.

b. At high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise required by fire-

resistance-rated assembly.

2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.




C. Multilayer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers

vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or and face-

layer joints offset at least one stud with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or

required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and

supplementary fasteners.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate

(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum

board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels

until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap

where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a

uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to

ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for

decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not

intended to receive tape.




D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, and concealed areas.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.

3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

4. Level 5: Apply to surfaces receiving gloss paint or wall covering where indicated on

Drawings. Refer to Finish Schedule.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other

non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall

application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.







Blank Page



CERAMIC TILE 093100 - 1

SECTION 093100 – CERAMIC TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic tile.

2. Waterproof membrane.

3. Crack isolation membrane.

4. Tile backing panels.

5. Metal edge strips.

6. Shower pan membrane.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and

isolation joints in tile surfaces.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units .

C. Tile installation shall comply with guidelines from the TCNA Handbook for Ceramic, Glass and

Stone Tile Installation, 2012 as follows:

1. Type 1: On ground, un-bonded, epoxy grout system – F114-12

2. Type 2: On ground, shower receptor, (epoxy grout) system – B415-12 for areas

designated as “WET” on Finish Schedule.

3. Type 3: Interior Walls on metal studs, no vapor barrier or membrane, (epoxy grout)

system – W244C-12

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1

apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,

ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,

ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14,

ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American

National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."




C. General: Installation guidelines and requirements as established in the Tile Council of North

America (TCNA) Handbook for Ceramic, Glass and Stone Tile Installation, Version 2012.1

apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

D. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

E. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.


A. Product Data: Installer shall submit product information on all accessories and supplementary

material as needed for a complete installation.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and

locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished

tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of

accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.

2. Other accessory items as may be needed.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.


A. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this

Section from a single manufacturer for each product (provided by installer):

1. Crack isolation membrane.

2. Joint sealants.

3. Cementitious backer units.

4. Metal edge strips.

5. Shower pan membrane.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Owner will use mockup

as reference for acceptable level of installation. Installer shall get written acceptance of mockup

installation from Contractor and Owner prior to proceeding with work. All subsequent work

will be compared to the approved mockup. Work not meeting or exceeding these expectations

will be subject to non-acceptance.




1. Build mockup of each type of corner detail.

2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.

3. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.

4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at per the Construction Manager. Refer to

Construction Manager Scope of Work.

1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.

Proceeding with work indicates acceptance for all substrates.

2. Review and comply with TCNA recommendations for wall and floor systems listed in

these Specifications.

3. Review project conditions.

4. Determine location of mock-ups.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact

until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces

from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile,

remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

F. Store tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, in spaces indicated

by Owner, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer.

G. Installers shall use the Owner storage area for storage until such time as the product can be

installed. Installers shall be responsible for the transportation of the stock from the storage area

to the rooms for installation. Installers shall only relocate product as needed for the next 24

hours of work. Once stock has been removed from the storage area, it becomes the

responsibility of the installer until it is installed.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in

referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Tile

1. Tile 1: Ergon Cornerstone, Granite Stone 12x24

2. Tile 2: Ergon Cornerstone, Granite Stone 3x24 Standard Bullnose

3. Tile 3: Ergon Cornerstone, Granite Stone 24x48

4. Tile 4: 2x2 Crossville Pennsylvania Blue




8. Tile 8: Datile, Color Colorbody, Gallant Gray Unpolished 12x24

9. Tile 9: Datile, Valor Colorbody, Gallant Unpolished 3x12

B. Grout

1. Grout 1: Maipei Epoxy grout #27 Silver

2. Grout 2: Maipei Epoxy grout # 47 Charcoal

3. Grout 3: Laticrete Epoxy grout #78 Sterling Silver

4. Grout 4: Maipei Unsanded Keracolor #00 White

C. Mortar

1. Mortar 1: Maipei Adesilex P10 bright white nonsag mortar for glass tile

2. Mortar 2: GC to spec to use with BS2

D. All other materials needed for complete installation provided by Installer.

2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325 (TYPE B), in maximum lengths

available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.



a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.

b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.

c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.

d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.










2.3 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high

performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include

reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

1. Installer shall provide and install crack isolation membrane as required for this project.

2. Crack isolation membrane shall be compatible with all products used including Owner

provided materials.

3. Installer shall provide crack isolation as recommended by job conditions, manufacturer

and per industry standards.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Mortar

1. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging

mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.

2. Refer to TCNA manual for wall and floor systems requirements.

3. Confirm Mortar is compatible with “WET” floor and wall systems. Installer shall

provide necessary materials for complete “WET” floor and wall systems.

2.5 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Grout

1. Refer to TCNA manual for wall and floor systems requirements.

2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with

the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants."

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed

joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;

Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with

fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that

are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.



a. DAP Inc.; Titanium Enriched Kitchen and Bath Sealant

b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.

c. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700.








d. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant.

e. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.

f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations

indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or

combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring

applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

C. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect

exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and

grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.

1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with

a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87.

2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is

specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and

grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout

manufacturers.

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout

manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Use only clean, clear water.

D. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and

other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance

characteristics for installations indicated.

E. Only mix amount of grout that can be successfully worked and cleaned to leave a haze free

installation.







PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are

incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by

ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with

surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically

scarified.

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or

grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical

units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if

not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.

5. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thick-set mortar comply with

surface finish requirements for TCNA “WET” floor system.


C. Follow installation guidelines as outlined in the 2012 TCNA Handbook.

D. Concrete must be fully cured for 28 days or as per manufacturer’s printed “suitable substrates”

requirements.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set

mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-

setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar

bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.

Provide allowance for pea gravel weep protection per TCNA B415-12 in “WET” areas.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and

packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from

other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to

manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.




D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent

grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of

temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with

parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are

referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to

types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile

installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Exterior tile floors.

b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.

c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete

covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for

straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other

penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center

tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize

the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise

indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within

tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same

size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on

floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

F. Joint Widths: Shall be determined by Owner. If not provided by Owner, install tile with the

following joint widths:

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm.

3. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

4. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).




G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

Layout shall include allowance for bullnose tile. Refer to Finish Schedule for specific wainscot

requirements.

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated and where required by specific project

conditions. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not

saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above

them.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants” or as required by tile manufacturer.

I. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other

flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.

3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's

written instructions for type of application indicated. Verify that Owner provided mortar is

compatible with backer unit and TCNA wall system.

B. Maximum allowable variation in the tile substrate, for tiles with all edge shorter than 15”,

maximum allowable variation is ¼” in 10’ from the required plane, with no more than 1/16”

variation in 12” when measured from the high points in the surface. For tiles with at least one

edge 15” in length, maximum allowable variation is 1/8” in 10’ from the required plane, with

nor more than 1/16” variation in 24” when measured from the high points in the surface.

C. Horizontal joints: 1/8” spacing filled solid and taped with latex-portland cement mortar and 4”

alkali-resistant glass fiber mesh tape.

D. Vertical joints: fill any space and tape with latex-portland cement mortar and 4” alkali-resistant

glass fiber mesh tape.

E. Corners: leave space between backer units. Tape joints using skim coat of latex-portland

cement mortar, but do not fill.

3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written

instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.




3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are

free of foreign matter.

1. Remove epoxy grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended

by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by

testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and

plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and

after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer

and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent

drain clogging.

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to

prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral

protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is

completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from

tile surfaces.

3.7 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations

1. Type 1: On ground, un-bonded, epoxy grout system – F114-12

2. Type 2: On ground, shower receptor, (epoxy grout) system – B415-12 for areas

designated as “WET” on Finish Schedule.

3. Type 3: Interior Walls on metal studs, no vapor barrier or membrane, (epoxy grout)

system – W244C-12




ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.


1. Section 092216 “Non-Structural Metal Framing”

C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling

attachment devices to be cast in concrete. Refer to Construction Manager Scope of Work


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site as indicated in the Project

Manager’s Scope of Work.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm)

in size.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.

4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.




b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

5. Architect can provide base drawings for use in preparation. Installer shall prepare new

coordination drawings for Project specific conditions.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials (attic stock) that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Quantities listed

are to be presented to Owner after final review and acceptance of project (after Project Punch

List is complete).

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 5 percent of quantity installed.

2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to (2) two

percent of quantity installed.

3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 5 percent of quantity installed.

4. Impact Clips: Equal to 5 percent of quantity installed.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in

original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they

will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct

sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized

moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed

and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and




ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project

when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before

beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of

another qualified testing agency.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.

2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension

system from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

D. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated

that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical

ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of

test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface according to

ASTM E 795.

E. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each

product type.

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern

designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations,

provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply




with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical

performance, edge detail, and size.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS – Acoustical Ceiling #4 (per Finish Schedule)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USC #2110, Radar

as manufactured by USG Interiors or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.


3. National Gypsum Company

4. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

5. Tectum Inc.

6. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

A. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as

follows:

1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.

A. Color: White.

B. LR: Not less than 0.85.

C. NRC: Not less than 0.55.

D. CAC: Not less than 33.

E. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

F. Thickness: 5/8 inch (19 mm).

G. Modular Size: 24” x 24” as indicated on Drawings

H. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels

treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold,

mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or

bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to

ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS – Vinyl Faced ACT #5 (per Finish Schedule)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide National as

manufactured by National Gypsum Company or comparable product by one of the following:



3. National Gypsum Company















5. Tectum Inc.


B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM C 1396, Class I, ASTM E 1264, Type

XX, Patters E, G - for type, form, and pattern as follows:

1. Type: Vinyl faced Gypsum Ceiling Panels – Gold Bond Brand Gridstone Gypsum

Ceiling Panels or equal

C. Color: White.

D. LR: 1

E. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

F. Thickness: ½” inch.

G. Modular Size: 24” x 24”.

H. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels

treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold,

mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or

bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to

ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

I. Finish: 2 mil white stipple vinyl laminate

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension-System heavy duty: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal

suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with

applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,

Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft

temper.

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but

provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:










B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll

formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip

galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation;

with prefinished 02/11-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.

3. Face Design: Flat, flush.

4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.

5. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS, TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:




4. Fry Reglet Corporation.

5. Gordon, Inc.


B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not

indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with

seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that

used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and

suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners


2. Provide miter corners, corner caps or other accessories as needed for all grid transitions

or terminations.

2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

















D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective

in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building

construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical

panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified

in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel

ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture

damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply

with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

B. Coordinate with all other trades. Make field adjustments as needed.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic

design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's

"Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces

by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard

suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in

form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a

minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structures.




5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,

install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

6. Do not attach hangers to roof panels. Attach hangers to structural members.

7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported

directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches

(200 mm) from ends of each member.

8. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four

tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and

where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system

to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and

connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.

Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system

runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,

precise fit.

1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of

suspension-system runners and moldings.

2. Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as

recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and

suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and

touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be

successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.




RESILIENT BASE 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.


1. Section 096516 "Resilient Sheet Flooring" for resilient sheet floor coverings.

2. Section 096813 “Tile Carpeting”.


A. Product Data: Submit for review.

B. Product Schedule: For resilient products, refer to Finish Schedule.


A. Collect any leftover materials of products installed; package with protective covering for

storage. Identify with labels describing contents, and present to Owner for future use.


A. Maintenance Data: Each type of resilient base shall be included in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has

specialized in installing work similar to that required for this project.




B. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements,

confirm needed quantities, substrate conditions & manufacturer’s recommended substrates and

required preparation manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty

requirements.

C. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups for inside corners, outside corners, and mid-

wall splices. All mockups shall be approved in writing by Owner prior to installation.


A. Installers shall use the Owner designated storage area for storage until such time as the product

can be installed. Installers shall be responsible for the transportation of the stock from the

storage area to the rooms for installation. Installers shall only relocate product as needed for the

next 48 hours of work. Once stock has been removed from the storage area, it becomes the

responsibility of the installer until it is installed.


A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,

areas to receive resilient wall base shall be clean, fully enclosed, weather tight with the

permanent HVAC set at a uniform ambient temperatures within range recommended by

manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in spaces

to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

Resilient wall base must be unboxed & acclimated in area of use at least 48 hours prior to

installation.

B. Minimum temperature shall be a 65 degrees F after installation.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, flooring, and

ceiling work, have been completed.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Materials Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard

warranty document. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other

rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

1. Warranty Period for installation: 2-year warranty commencing on Date of Substantial

Completion.

2. Limited Wear Warranty: 3 year limited wear warranty. Warranty held by Owner.

3. Notice of any defect must be made in writing to manufacturer within thirty (30) days

after Owner learns of the defect.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base: B1 – Visuelle Roppe Base #123 Charcoal and B2 Roppe Base (700 series) #123

Charcoal.

B. Lengths: Install in longest lengths allowable/available to minimize mid-wall splices.

C. Outside Corners: Job formed mitered corners, no corner blocks will be supplied.

D. Inside Corners: Job formed mitered corners, no corner blocks will be supplied.

E. Colors and Types: Refer to Finish Schedule for resilient base location and type.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesives compatible with resilient base selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installing requirements, visually inspect

materials prior to installing. Material with visual defects shall not be installed. Notify Owner

immediately of any material defects.

B. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

C. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in

other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign

deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.

B. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to

be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials, including adhesives, into spaces where

they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.




C. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before

installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient

base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Inside and Outside Corners: Use standard woodworking tools to miter cut corners at the

time of installation per manufacture’s instructions. Corners shall be tight, without gaps,

and have the top of the base pieces align.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient

products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Remove construction debris from project and dispose of legally.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.

E. Sweep broom clean and remove all construction debris.





Blank Page



TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular carpet tile.


1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories"


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at per Owner’s request Project site Insert

location.

1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not

limited to, the following:

a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures.

b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures.

c. Review subfloor preparation procedures.



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade

resistance.

B. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where

cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.

3. Type of subfloor.

4. Type of installation.

5. Pattern of installation.

6. Pattern type, location, and direction.

7. Pile direction.




8. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture

required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and

designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long

Samples.

D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and

procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,

but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified

Floorcovering Installers Association at the Master II certification level.


A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."





A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and

ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and

weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity

conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the

construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to

bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile

manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles,

install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of

carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,

failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs.

b. Dimensional instability.

c. Excess static discharge.

d. Loss of tuft-bind strength.

e. Loss of face fiber.

f. Delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE

A. MFR: Mohawk carpet- Lees brand.

B. Color: Corduroy.

C. Style: Vest GT 172-976




2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Tactiles, as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown,

of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize

running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other

conditions affecting carpet tile performance.

B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's

written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,

holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8

mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that

are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using

solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile

manufacturers.

D. Metal Substrates: Clean grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if recommended in writing by

adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand

aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet"

and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.




B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer with tactile

adhesive squares.

C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Maintain pile-direction patterns.

E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in

furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut

edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable

flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting

by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking

device.

H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by

carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.

3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20,

"Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and

fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or

recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.




INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1. Steel.

2. Galvanized metal.

3. Gypsum board.

B. Surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces.

1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to

shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections.

C. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a

surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an

item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or

surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or

finishes available.

1. Painting includes field-painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers,

exposed steel and iron work including exposed structural steel and joists, exposed metal

deck, and factory primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.

D. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces,

operating parts, and labels.

1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components:

a. Metal toilet enclosures.

b. Acoustic materials.

c. Factory finished woodwork and casework.

d. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.

e. Light fixtures.

f. Switchgear.

g. Distribution cabinets.

2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following

generally inaccessible areas:




a. Foundation spaces.

b. Furred areas.

c. Duct shafts.

d. Elevator shafts.

3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:

a. Anodized aluminum.

b. Stainless steel.

c. Chromium plate.

d. Copper.

e. Bronze.

f. Brass.

4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment, such as

the following:

a. Valve and damper operators.

b. Linkages.

c. Sensing devices.

d. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-

required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature

plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according

to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.





A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application

instructions.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations

indicated on Drawings and in schedules.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to

verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects

and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect or Owner will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for

application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).

b. Other Items: Architect or Owner will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Architect or Owner at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.





A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

B. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and

containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material.

2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).

3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Thinning instructions.

6. Application instructions.

7. Color name and number.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5

deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.9 MULTIPLE MASONRY WALL CONDITIONS

A. Contractor shall note that this Work includes the painting of both new masonry walls that are

part of this Scope of Work as well as all other masonry walls installed by others in the new

construction. All new masonry walls shall include block filler and new paint. Masonry walls

installed by others, under other scopes of work, will be provided with block filler, ready for new

paint. Said painting, labor and materials, is part of this Scope of Work. Contractor shall inspect

all block filled masonry walls prior to painting. It is the contractor’s responsibility to notify the

Owner and Architect if any of these masonry walls are unacceptable prior to proceeding.

Painting of these walls indicates full acceptance of said wall finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). Note that paint manufacturer may not be substituted

after Owner selects colors.






2. Tnemec Company Inc. – color to be selected by Owner.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, the Owner may accept alternative

manufacturers with prior approval.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed

in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As selected by Owner and Reference in Owner’s Color Schedule.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.

B. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.

C. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.

2.5 WOOD PRIMERS

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.

1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.

2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1.

2.6 LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Latex (eggshell): MP1 #52 (Gloss level 3).

B. Interior Latex (semigloss): MP1 #54 (Gloss level 5).




2.7 ALKYD PAINTS

A. Interior Alkyd (Eggshell): MPI #51 (Gloss Level 3).

B. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:

1. Wood: 15 percent

2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth and acceptable to

Owner.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

2. Verify Existing masonry wall block fillers are acceptable and compatible with new finish.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"

applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,

and incompatible paints and encapsulants.




1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie

coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal

fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that

promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

E. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and

sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI

Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture

with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar

hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety

and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:




a. Uninsulated metal piping.

b. Uninsulated plastic piping.

c. Pipe hangers and supports.

d. Metal conduit.

e. Plastic conduit.

f. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards.

b. Uninsulated metal piping.

c. Uninsulated plastic piping.

d. Pipe hangers and supports.

e. Metal conduit.

f. Plastic conduit.

g. Other items as directed by Owner.

3. Electrical Work:

a. Switchgear if not factory finished.

b. Panelboards if not factory finished.

c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and

inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply

additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site. Refer to Construction Manager Scope of Work.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.




3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. General: Provide one of the following paint systems, by one manufacturer, for each substrate

indicated. Refer to Drawings for specific colors selection b Owner.

B. Gypsum Drywall Systems:

1. Enamel Finish: Except where indicated for epoxy coating, provide Odorless Semigloss

Alkyd Enamel Finish. Three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.

a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer.

1) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.

b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.

1) S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series.

2. Epoxy Coating: High-Performance, Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy, Eggshell Finish. Two

finish coats with total dry film thickness not less than 4 mils, over primer.

a. Primer: Moisture – resistant primer as recommended by manufacturer of epoxy

coating for best performance of epoxy coating.

b. First and Second Coats: High-performance, Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy coating.

1) S-W: Tile-Clad II Epoxy Enamel B62 Series/B60V70.

2) Tnemec: Series 113 H.B. Teneme-Tufcoat

C. Ferrous Metal:

1. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: Except where indicated for semigloss enamel finish, provide

full gloss enamel finish, two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than

2.5 mils.

a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer.

1) S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.

b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.

1) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200.

c. Finish Coat: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel.

1) S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.

2. Semigloss Enamel Finish: At generally inaccessible areas, including overhead structure,

piping, door and frames, provide semigloss enamel finish, two coats over primer with

total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.

a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer.




1) S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.



c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.


D. Zinc-Coated Metal:

1. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less

than 2.5 mils.

a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.

1) S-W: Galvite B50W3.



c. Finish Coat: Exterior, gloss alkyd enamel.

1) S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.

E. Woodwork and Wood Doors Scheduled for Opaque Painted Finish.

1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats.

a. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.

1) S-W: Compatible undercoat

b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.






Blank Page



TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 1

SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures entrance screens and urinal

screens.


1. Section 102800 "Toilet Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves,

and similar accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.

2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.

3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. Include Samples of hardware and

accessories involving material and color selection.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.





A. Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and

ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and

other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before

fabrication.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall provide a two-year warranty. Refer to First Quality Scope of Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

C. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584.

D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455.

E. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected

for smoothness.

1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M, 01Z (03G).

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M, either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed.

F. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

G. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.

2.2 STEEL UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide General Partitions Mfg.

Corp. or comparable product of one of the Following:

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.





2. All American Metal Corp.

3. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.

4. Ampco, Inc.

5. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.

6. Flush Metal Partition Corp.

7. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 8. Global Steel Products Corp.

9. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.

10. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.

11. Metpar Corp.

12. Rockville Partitions Incorporated.

13. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company.

14. Shanahan's Limited.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor anchored.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung, flat panel.

D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to

core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures;

corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall

be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material,

or other imperfections.

1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-

impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25

mm) for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for pilasters.

2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars

mounted on units.

3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at

locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.

E. Urinal-Screen Construction:

1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction.

F. Facing Sheets and Closures: Electrolytically coated or hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet with

nominal base-metal (uncoated) thicknesses as follows:

1. Pilasters, Braced at Both Ends: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than

0.036 inch (0.91 mm).

2. Pilasters, Unbraced at One End: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than

0.048 inch (1.21 mm).

3. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.030 inch (0.76 mm).

4. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.030 inch (0.76 mm).

5. Flat-Panel Urinal Screens: Thickness matching the panels.

G. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch (0.79-mm)

nominal thickness and 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware.

H. Brackets (Fittings):

















1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

I. Steel-Sheet Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard

baked-on finish, including thermosetting, electrostatically applied, and powder coatings.

Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking. Apply one

color two colors in each room.

1. Color: As specified on Finish Schedule (General Partitions Autumn Brown).

Substitutions shall match this color. Color shall be submitted for Owner approval.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware

and accessories.

1. Material: Chrome-plated zamac.

2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold

doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees.

3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed surface-mounted latch unit designed

for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide

units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments

designated as accessible.

4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized

to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.

6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at

compartments designated as accessible.

B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or

chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-

type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use

stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring

assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide

shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in-

swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging

doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as

accessible.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,

straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended

anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).

B. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches (51 mm)

into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level,

plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of

pilasters when doors are in closed position.

C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and

plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

D. Coordinate with all wall finishes. Anchors to be fully seated on one material and not straddling

different materials or surfaces. Coordinate with Architect as needed.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's

written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open

approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging

doors to return doors to fully closed position.





Blank Page



TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



Supplementary Conditions and Request for Proposal docuements, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions.

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work

and substrate preparation.

3. Material and finish descriptions.

4. Features that will be included for Project.

5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each

accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Warranty: Provide 2-year warranty minimum on all materials.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products

from single source from single manufacturer.




1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required

for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,

cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent

delaying the Work.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide 2-year warranty covering materials and labor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness


B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products

with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-

inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating.

E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-

theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.




2.2 TOILET ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.

2. American Specialties, Inc.

3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

4. Bradley Corporation.

5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.

B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.

2. Description: Model 9030; Surface Mounted Twin Hide-a-roll Toilet Paper Dispenser.

3. Operation: Non-control delivery with standard spindle.

4. Capacity: Designed for 2 (two) 5-1/4”diameter tissue rolls.

5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 satin finish.

6. Provide one dispenser per water closet.

C. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: GOJO TFX Touch Free Dispenser - Black.

2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in lather form.

3. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted using fasteners.

4. Capacity: 1200 mL.

5. Materials: Black with matte finish.

6. Lockset: None

7. Provide one per single toilet, one per double bowl sink, two per triple bowl sink.

D. Grab Bar:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.

3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.048 inch (1.2 mm) thick.

4. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin)

5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

6. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawing.

E. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc Model 0473-A.

2. Mounting: Surface mounted.

3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel.

4. Receptacle: Removable.

5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)

6. Provide one per women’s stall/single use women’s toilet.











F. Mirror Unit:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc Model 0600

2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.048 inch (1.2 mm)

a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated

below.

a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices

requiring a special tool to remove.

4. Size: As indicated on Drawing

5. Provide one mirror per sink, centered.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and

access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and

with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.

Provide minimum of (10) ten keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and

firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested

according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.




FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1

SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.


1. Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers."


A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers

indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

1.5 SEQUENCING

A. Apply decals on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in

ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.




2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or

comparable product by one of the following:

a. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

b. GMR International Equipment Corporation.

c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

d. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

e. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

f. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.

g. Nystrom, Inc.

h. Potter Roemer LLC.

i. Strike First Corporation of America.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated, 1-hour fire rated.

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from

0.043-inch- (1.09-mm-) thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-

mm-) thick fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

D. Recessed Cabinet:

1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) 4-inch (102-mm) 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) backbend

depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet Aluminum sheet Extruded-aluminum shapes Stainless-steel

sheet Copper-alloy brass sheet Copper-alloy bronze sheet Same material and finish as door.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Full acrylic bubble with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Molded acrylic bubble.

1. Acrylic Bubble Color: Clear, transparent.

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet

type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch.

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open

180 degrees.

J. Accessories:














1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to

fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers

indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,

size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Fire Marshall.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with notation per owner.

1) Location: Applied to cabinet trim above door.

2) Application Process: Decals or Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters.

3) Lettering Color: Per owner.

4) Orientation: Vertical, per owner.

K. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

b. Color: As selected by owner from full range of industry colors and color densities.

2. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick,

with Finish 1 (smooth or polished)

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and

hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth.

2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated

and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2

inch (13 mm) thick.

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.

3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground

smooth.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.




C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and

cabinets will be installed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and

trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not

indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of cabinet.

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is

inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.

2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

C. Identification: Apply decals or vinyl lettering at locations indicated by owner.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets

are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral

locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as

recommended by manufacturer.




D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-

finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-

protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful

repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.





Blank Page



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire

extinguishers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and

mounting brackets.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable

Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket or cabinet indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Amerex Corporation.

b. Ansul Incorporated.

c. Badger Fire Protection.

d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.

e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.

f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

g. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

h. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.

i. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

j. Moon American.

k. Nystrom Building Products.

l. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.

m. Potter Roemer LLC.

n. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.

o. Strike First Corporation of America.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections,

maintenance, and recharging.

B. Regular Dry-Chemical Type in Aluminum Container 60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg) nominal capacity,

with sodium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled-aluminum container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Where shown on Drawings or as may be required by AFB life safety

requirements. Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to



















wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with

plated or red baked-enamel finish.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Amerex Corporation.

b. Ansul Incorporated.

c. Badger Fire Protection.

d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.

e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.

f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

g. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

h. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

i. Nystrom Building Products.

j. Potter Roemer LLC.

k. Strike First Corporation of America.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,

spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in

red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Horizontal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in

compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations

indicated.
















Blank Page

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RETAIL SUPPORT CENTER EXPANSION

Project ELM

Tenant Improvements

SCWA JOB # 16-034

CONTENTS

DIVISION 21: FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

Section 21 13 10 Fire Protection

DIVISION 22: PLUMBING

Section 22 02 29 Valves for Plumbing Piping

Section 22 05 10 General Provisions

Section 22 05 23 Hangers and Supports

Section 22 07 19 Piping Insulation

Section 22 11 16 Pipe and Fittings

Section 22 34 00 Domestic Hot Water Heaters

Section 22 43 10 Plumbing Fixtures, Trim and Accessories

DIVISION 23: HEATING VENTILATING AND

AIRCONDITIONING

Section 23 05 13 Basic Mechanical Requirements

Section 23 05 90 Testing and Balancing

Section 23 07 16 Duct Insulation

Section 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation

Section 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC

Section 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

Section 23 31 10 Ductwork and Accessories

Section 23 34 20 Exhaust Fans

Section 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units

Section 23 73 13 Modular Indoor Air Handling Units

Section 23 95 00 Project Closeout

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 211310-1

SECTION 211310 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. The Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall be selected and contracted directly by the Owner. The

General Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling and coordinating fire sprinkler

work with all other trades.

B. The work under this section shall include furnishing and installing all materials for the complete

installation of the following:

Wet Pipe Sprinkler System zoned as shown on FP drawings.

and shall apply to all of work specified, shown on the drawings or reasonably required to provide

for the complete installation of approved fire protection systems for the project. This structure is

classed as fully sprinklered.

C. Fire protection system shall be in accordance with the following industry standards:

AWWA C110 Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3 inch thru 48 inch, for

Water and other Liquids

AWWA C151 Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water and other

Liquids

AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains

NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems

NFPA 24 Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their

Appurtenances

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

IBC International Building Code

UL FPED Fire Protection Equipment Directory

UL 262 Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service

UL 789 Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Service

1.2 GENERAL

A. The contractor for the fire protection installation shall be a NICET III Certified, qualified Fire

Protection Contractor, and regularly engaged in the installation of Automatic Fire Sprinkler

Systems and other Fire Protection Equipment.


B. All materials, equipment valves and devices installed and/or furnished under this section shall be

listed and/or approved for use in the fire protection installation by the authorities, agencies,

codes and standards named in this section of the specifications.

C. Refer to: Underwriters' Laboratories Approved Fire Protection Equipment List.

D. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included in this section which

are required by any of the authorities and/or agencies having jurisdiction shall be obtained and

paid for by the Fire Protection Contractor.

1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Design automatic wet pipe sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13 the required and

advisory provisions of NFPA 13, by hydraulic calculations for uniform distribution of water over

the design area. Pipe sizes indicated on the drawings are shown to illustrate a sample system.

Actual pipe sizes shall be determined by hydraulic calculation. Pipe sizes which are shown as

minimum sizes may be increased in size but should not be decreased.

A separate wet pipe zone will be provided for the project as shown on the drawings. The new

zone will be connected to the existing ESFR piping overhead. The same space will be classified

as light hazard with the exception of storage rooms, mechanical rooms, and also the lab. These

spaces will be classified as ordinary hazard.

1.4 GUARANTEE

A. The entire fire protection installation, as specified under this section of the specifications, shall

be guaranteed for one (1) year against defective equipment, materials and workmanship. The

guarantee period is to begin on the date of acceptance of the project by the Owner.

B. The guarantee shall not be construed as requiring the Fire Protection Contractor to render service

or maintenance required in the normal operation of the equipment, or to make repairs that may be

needed due to normal wear and tear or the Owner's negligence, abuse, or breakage.

1.5 EXISTING MAIN PRESSURES AT SITE

A. Pressure readings shall be acquired by the Contractor.

B. The actual locations of mains, branch mains and sprinkler heads should be coordinated with

other trades and shall meet all Code requirements.

C. The locations shown for items such as standpipes with hose valves, control valves, zone

boundaries, etc., have been coordinated with the architectural and mechanical requirements, any

deviations from the locations shown for this equipment should be verified.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Hydraulic calculations


B. Manufacturer's Catalog Data

1. Pipe and fittings

2. Alarm valves

3. Valves, including gate, check and globe

4. Water motor alarms

5. Sprinkler heads

6. Pipe hangers and supports

7. Pressure or flow switch

8. Mechanical couplings

C. Shop drawings

1. Sprinkler heads and piping system layout

2. Electrical wiring diagrams

a. Sprinkler Heads and Piping System Layout: Prepare 24- by 36-inch detail

working drawings of system layout in accordance with NFPA 13, "Working

Drawings (Plans)." Show data essential for proper installation of each system.

Show details, plan view, elevations, and sections of the systems supply and

piping. Show piping schematic of systems supply, devices, valves, pipe, and

fittings. These drawings shall have reviewed, approved and stamped by the

appropriate fire department prior to submission to Engineer.

1.7 SYSTEMS

A. Provide flow switch with main drain and pressure gauges. Switches shall be fully compatible

with fire alarm system.

B. A standard installation of automatic sprinklers arranged as a wet pipe system should be installed

as required by the computerized hydraulic analysis.

C. Provide drains at all trapped locations exceeding 5 gallons. On far mains on typical zones

provide 1” globe valves on bottom of main for auxiliary drains.

D. Connection to the water supply system shall be made where indicated on the drawings or at the

closest adequate cost.

E. The water piping, valving, sprinkling equipment and hose connections shall be installed complete

in all respects.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS: Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and

for connections. Make changes in piping sizes through tapered reducing pipe fittings; bushings

will not be permitted. Perform welding in the shop; field welding will not be permitted. Conceal

piping in areas with suspended ceiling and exposed in mechanical room.

A. Sprinkler Pipe and Fittings: NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Steel piping shall be Schedule

40. Fittings into which sprinkler heads, sprinkler head riser nipples, or drop nipples are threaded

shall be welded, threaded, or grooved-end type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings and

fittings which use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe when pressure is applied will not be

permitted. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings shall be


permitted in pipe sizes 1.5 inches and larger. Fittings shall be UL FPED listed for use in wet

pipe sprinkler systems. Fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets shall be supplied by

the same manufacturer. Steel piping with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 shall not be

threaded. Side outlet tees using rubber gasket fittings shall not be permitted.

B. Cabinet: Provide metal cabinet with extra sprinkler heads and sprinkler head wrench adjacent to

each alarm valve. The number and types of extra sprinkler heads shall be as specified in NFPA

13.

2.3 ALARMS

A. Zone riser shall include a flow switch connected to the existing fire alarm system.

2.4 FIRE DEPARTMENT HOSE CONNECTIONS

A. The fire department hose connection shall be provided. Threads on connection shall match

Existing Fire Department threads present on site.

B. Connection shall be plain finished with "AUTO SPKR" branded on top.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing

shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Install piping straight and true

to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Do not hang piping from plaster ceilings. Keep the

interior and ends of new piping and existing piping affected by Contractor's operations

thoroughly cleaned of water and foreign matter. Keep piping systems clean during installation

by means of plugs or other approved methods. When work is not in progress, securely close

open ends of piping to prevent entry of water and foreign matter. Inspect piping before placing

into position.

B. Electrical Work: Provide electrical work associated with this section under Section 16, "Interior

Wiring Systems," except for control and fire alarm wiring. Provide fire alarm system under

"Interior Fire Alarm System." Provide control and fire alarm wiring, including connections to

fire alarm systems, under this section in accordance with NFPA 70. Provide wiring in rigid

metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit, except electrical metallic tubing conduit may be

used in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage.

C. Disinfection: Disinfect the new water piping affected by Contractor's operations in accordance

with AWWA C651. Exercise caution when mixing chlorine disinfectant solutions. Fill piping

systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million of available chlorine and

allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from the systems with clean

water until maximum residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 part per million or residual

chlorine content of domestic water supply. Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory

bacteriological samples from new water piping, analyze by a certified laboratory, and submit


results prior to new water piping being place into service. Disinfection of system supplied by

nonpotable water is not required.

D. Tests: Hydrostatically test system at 200 psig for a 2-hour period with no leakage or reduction in

pressure. Flush piping with potable water in accordance with NFPA 13. Piping above suspended

ceilings shall be tested, inspected, and approved before installation of ceilings. Test the alarms

and other devices. Test the water flow alarms by flowing water through the inspector's test

connection. When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed and dated

certificate, similar to the specified in NFPA 13.

E. Guarantee: The entire fire protection installation, as specified under this section of the

specifications, shall be guaranteed for one (1) year against defective equipment, materials and

workmanship. The guarantee period is to begin on the date of acceptance of the project by the

Owner.

F. The guarantee shall not be construed as requiring the Fire Protection Contractor to render service

or maintenance required in the normal operation of the equipment, or to make repairs that may be

needed due to normal wear and tear or the Owner's negligence, abuse, or breakage.

END OF SECTION

VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220229 - 1

SECTION 22 02 29 - VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide all material, equipment and labor, etc., required to complete installation as

specified herein and/or shown or scheduled on plans.

B. This section includes the installation of all valves.

C. Valves shall be in accordance with the following industry standards:

MSS SP-67 Butterfly Valves

MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

MSS SP-70 Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-72 Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service

MSS SP-80 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves

MSS SP-85 Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

D. Submittals

1. Provide submittal data showing product is in compliance with these

specifications and the referenced industry standards.

2. Valves shall have name or trademark of manufacturer and working pressure cast

or stamped on valve body.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PROVIDE BALL VALVES FOR THE FOLLOWING PIPING SYSTEMS:

A. Domestic water

1. Ball valves, 3 inch diameter or less:

a. Combroco 32-200 125 psi

2.2 Provide check valves for the following systems:

A. Domestic water

1. Swing check type, 2 inch diameter or less:

a. Valves shall be bronze, swing type in accordance with MIL-V-18436.

Valves shall be rated for 125# SWP. Valves shall be:

Nibco S-413-Bq Stockham B-309

Milwaukee 1509 Crane 1342

VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220229 - 2

2.3 Miscellaneous

A. Gage Cock Crane No. 744

B. Drain Valves: Gate valves conforming to MSS SP-80, manually operated 3/4-inch pipe

size and above, with threaded ends. Provide hose nipple adapters for connecting a hose

to lead to a convenient floor drain. Provide frost-free valves for installations exposed to

weather.

2.4 Copper Pipe

A. Models indicated in this Section are for steel pipe. Since copper service is indicated,

Contractor shall supply a valve of the same type specified, but for copper pipe.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install at equipment and as indicated on drawings to allow maintenance or isolation, and

to establish proper and sequential operation of complete system. Shell and tube liquid

coolers shall have fluid valves installed so that tubes are accessible for cleaning or

replacing. Provide globe valves or plug cocks where required to regulate flow to obtain

equal distribution of gas or fluid handled. Remove valve bonnets, where valve

construction permits removal, when connecting valves by brazing to copper tubing.

Install globe and angle valves with stems horizontal where necessary to avoid trapping of

fluid.

END OF SECTION

GENERAL PROVISIONS 220510-1

SECTION 22 05 10 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide all material, equipment and labor, etc., required to complete installation

specified herein and/or shown or scheduled on Plans.

1.2 INSTRUCTIONS

A. The General Conditions, Information to Bidders, Special Conditions, and other pertinent

documents issued are a part of these specifications and shall be complied with in every

respect.

B. This Contractor shall examine the General Construction Plans, the Structural Plans and

the Electrical Plans and lay out his work accordingly to avoid conflict.

C. This Contractor shall visit the site in order to familiarize himself with existing working

conditions. Failure to do so shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility of making

changes required by conditions encountered on site.

D. This Contractor shall conform to standards prescribed by City, County and State

regulations or ordinances having jurisdiction. Any changes that may be necessary to

conform to such regulations or ordinances shall be made by this Contractor without extra

cost to the Owner.

E. This Contractor shall provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed,

mentioned, or scheduled on the drawings and/or herein including all labor, materials,

equipment and incidentals necessary, required or implied, for the completion of the

various systems.

F. Permits required for the installation of the work, as well as all authorized code

inspections, including all fees, meters, and assessments, shall be borne by and arranged

for by the Contractor.

1.3 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the various systems. If any

departure from these drawings is necessary, descriptions of these departures and a

statement of the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

B. These Plans and Specifications shall be considered a part of this Contract. Should an

error or omission occur in either the plans or the specifications, or conflict between the

two, the Contractor shall not avail himself of such unintentional error, omission or

conflict, but shall request same be explained to him and adjusted before signing the

Contract or proceeding with the work. After that time the Engineer's resolution of the

conflict shall be considered final. The Engineer extends no warranty on the documents

to any person or entity other than the Owner identified in the Owner-Contractor

agreement.


C. Heating, plumbing, piping, and wiring plans being necessarily drawn to scale are

diagrammatic only. They are intended to indicate capacity or size where stipulated,

approximate location, direction and general arrangement of one phase to the other or to

the general construction, but not the exact details or arrangement of construction. If,

before installation of portions of any or all construction phases, it is found that a more

suitable, more workable or more convenient arrangement of any or all phases of the

project would result by varying or altering the arrangement from that indicated on the

drawings, it shall be done without additional cost to the Owner. Such re-arrangement

shall be in accordance with directions from the Engineer or his representative.

D. Concerning discrepancies discovered after certain portions of any contract have been

installed, the Engineer reserves the right to require any or all Contractors to make minor

changes in pipe, ducts, fixture or equipment locations or arrangements to avoid conflicts

with other work at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Because the drawings are to a relatively small scale to show as large a portion as is

practical, the fact that only certain features of the system are indicated does not mean

that other similar features or details will not be required. Contractors shall furnish all

incidental labor, material or equipment for the systems in their control so that each

system is a complete and operating one unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the

detailed body of the specifications.

1.4 LIST OF MATERIALS, FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT

A. Within thirty (30) days after award of Contract, submit a complete list of materials,

fixtures and equipment to the Engineer for approval. There shall be five (5) copies

of data on each item and they shall be complete with names and addresses of

manufacturers, catalog and model numbers, trade names, any options, capacities,

and the Engineer's mark or symbol for that item all clearly marked on each data

sheet. Approval shall be based on manufacturer's published ratings only.

Materials or equipment rejected shall be revised and re-submitted within thirty

(30) days. Failure to comply with the above mentioned deadlines shall disallow any

substitutions of materials or equipment. After two rejections of any item, the

Contractor will be required to submit on that item exactly as specified.

B. Submittals shall be bound in a three ring binder. There shall be an index clearly

identifying each item being submitted. Each section shall be clearly tagged such

that it corresponds to the index.

C. Contractor shall not delegate the authority to material supply houses to present

data for approval. This shall be done by the Contractor.

D. Partial submittals will not be accepted. HVAC, Plumbing, and Fire Protection can

be submitted separately as a complete submittal.

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS OF MATERIALS

A. Where a definite material is specified, it is not the intent to discriminate against any

product of another manufacturer. It is the intent to set a definite standard.


B. Open competition is expected, but in all cases, complete data must be submitted on all

proposed substitutions and samples shall be submitted for comparison and test when

requested by the Engineer.

C. Where three or more manufacturers or suppliers are listed for any given material,

equipment, or service the Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to provide

material, equipment, or service from one of the named manufacturers or suppliers.

Reference to a brand name, however, will not excuse that or any brand from compliance

with all specified requirements. The Engineer expressly reserves the right to reject the

use of unnamed material, equipment or services.

D. The words "or equal", "equal to", etc,. signify that the written approval of the Engineer

must be obtained before any substitutions may be made for the items specified well in

advance of the time when such items are needed. The Engineer's approval will not

relieve the Contractor of responsibility for material, equipment or work later found to be

defective or otherwise unsuitable for the work. The Engineer will not approve

equipment prior to submittals submission after job is bid.

E. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to ascertain if the substitute items will fit

into the space allotted as conveniently as the items specified. Any changes to the

building system or electrical design necessary shall be arranged for in writing before

material is ordered. All costs involved in making such changes shall be borne by the

Contractor. If such changes are deemed inadvisable by the Engineer, the Contractor

shall install items specified even though substitute item had been previously approved.

Engineer's approval of a substitute is for performance and/or design only.

1.6 STARTING AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. All equipment and systems shall be tested as hereinafter specified or directed by the

Engineer.

B. Furnish a competent mechanic to supervise the starting, adjusting and testing of all

equipment and to train the operator in the operation of the system. Where specified,

certain major items of equipment shall be installed under the supervision of and tested by

a specialist furnished by the manufacturer of the equipment. Such specialist shall train

the operator in the use of his equipment.

C. Furnish manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions for equipment and

systems. Mount operating instructions in approved frame with glass cover and locate

where directed.

1.7 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Responsibility for care and protection of equipment and materials under this Contract

rests with this Contractor until equipment or materials have been tested and accepted.

B. All pipe ends, valves, and parts of equipment left unconnected, permanently or

temporary, shall be capped, plugged or properly protected to prevent entry of foreign

matter.


1.8 SERVICE AVAILABILITY

A. The availability of service is of prime importance to the Owner and was a major

consideration in selecting items as a basis for this specification. The Contractor is

advised, therefore, to exercise caution in accepting prices in the "or equal" clause in this

specification. The service agency, as a representative of this manufacturer, must have

been in continuous operation in this area sufficient time to indicate a degree of

permanence as required by the Engineer.

1.9 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Applicable Codes

1. All work performed and all materials used shall conform to the standards as set

up by the following codes:

a. National Electrical Code

b. International Plumbing Code

c. International Building Code

d. National Fire Codes - NFPA

e. ASHRAE Guide

f. SMACNA, Duct Construction Standards

g. Local City, County and State codes

1.10 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. General

1. All mechanical work performed under this Contract shall be in accordance with

Division 26, Electrical, Division 27 Communications, & Division 28 Electrical

Safety and Security.

2. All motors under this Contract shall have thermal overload protection.

3. Motor starters required for manual or automatic control other than those shown

in a motor control center or motor starter panel shall be furnished by mechanical

contractor and installed by electrical contractor as directed. Manually controlled

motors shall be provided with hand-off-automatic switches integral with the

starter. All magnetic starters shall be provided with red running pilot light in

cover and three-phase overload protection. Motor starters shall be Square D or

approved equal.

4. Motor starters shall be furnished specifically for the following:

a. All three-phase motors.

b. All single-phase motors rated over 120 volts.

c. All single-phase motors rated 120 volts where interlocked with other

motors or controlled devices.

5. Starters shall be enclosed in NEMA 1 enclosures when located indoors, NEMA

3R enclosures when located outdoors, and when located in hazardous or

classified locations shall be enclosed in an enclosure rated for the specific type

atmosphere expected to be present.

6. Power Connections (Line Voltage): For controlled circuits shall be furnished

and installed from distribution or power panel to disconnect (safety) switch,

starter and final connection to motor by Electrical Contractor.

7. Control circuit wiring required for interlocking starters and remote control of


controlled devices, including conduit, wiring, boxes and final connections shall

be the sole responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor. Where controlled

interlocking of motor is required, all starters shall be furnished with two (2)

normally open and one (1) normally closed auxiliary contacts. This shall include

connections to Energy Management Panel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and

mechanical appearance when completed. All materials shall be of type, quality and

minimum rating prescribed therein or indicated on the Plans.

3.2 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. This CONTRACTOR shall protect his work at all times from danger by freezing,

breakage, dirt, foreign materials, etc., and shall replace all work so damaged. The

CONTRACTOR shall use every precaution to protect the work of others, and he will be

held responsible for all damage to other work caused by his work or through the neglect

of his workmen.

END OF SECTION

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 220523-1

SECTION 22 05 23 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide supporting devices for mechanical systems as described herein.

B. Isolators shall be in accordance with the following industry standards:

ASTM D 2240 Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness

ARI 370 Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Equipment

ARI 575 Measuring Machinery Sound Within an Equipment Space

C. Submittals

1. Provide submittal data showing product is in compliance with these


1.2 PIPE HANGERS

A. All horizontal pipes are to be supported by adjustable hangers supported below structure.

Use Fee and Mason 239, Grinnell, or Midland-Ross. Use Fee and Mason Figure 81,

Grinnell or Midland-Ross protectors on all insulated pipe and install hangers on outside

of insulation.

B. Where piping is grouped in parallel horizontal runs at same elevation, or as otherwise

noted on plans, bar-type supports may be used using Fee and Mason Figure 8005,

Grinnell, or Midland-Ross hangers or Unistrut channels.

C. All vertical risers shall be supported at the floor by Fee and Mason Figure 241, Grinnell,

or Midland-Ross riser clamps in addition to adequate base supports.

D. Hangers are to be installed not more than ten feet (10') apart on 1-1/2 inch and larger

pipe and not more than eight feet (8') apart on pipe smaller than 1-1/2 inches.

1.3 FOUNDATIONS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. This Contractor shall provide suitable foundations and supports, as indicated on

drawings, specified herein, or as required to make a neat, substantial and workmanlike

job. All foundations, supports, stands, etc., shall be approved by the Engineer prior to

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(Not Applicable)

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 220523-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Support equipment as specified herein.

B. Provide isolators for equipment and piping systems as specified herein.

C. Install isolators, materials and equipment as per manufacturer’s directions.

END OF SECTION

PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION 220719-1

SECTION 22 07 19- PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE



B. Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for HVAC

piping, ductwork and equipment.

C. Industry Standards

D. Insulation systems shall be in accordance with the following industry standards:

ASTM C 1136 Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM D 828 Tensile Breaking Strength of Paper and Paperboard

ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

ASTM E 96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation

Systems

NFPA 255 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials


UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

E. Submittals: Provide submittal data showing product is in compliance with these


1.2 GENERAL

A. Insulation shall include all insulating materials, their application, recanvassing after

finish, bands, tie wire, and weather protection for all pipe fittings, valve and equipment

as indicated and as specified herein.

B. Insulation and insulation assemblies shall meet the requirements of International

Building Code (IBC), unless more stringent requirements are listed herein.

C. Concealed insulation shall have a flame spread of 0-75 and a smoke developed of 0-450.


D. Exposed insulation shall have a flame spread of 0-50 and a smoke developed of 0-450.

E. Scope of Insulation: All new piping as indicated below, or where indicated on plans,

details or schematics. All piping components exposed and subject to freezing shall be

insulated. This includes valves, expansion joints, orifices, etc. Where gauge cocks,

orifice ports and other similar devices require access, such devices shall have extensions

beyond insulation provided by mechanical contractor.

F. If a material specified herein becomes unavailable, or if there is a question regarding the

required insulating material on this job, insulator shall advise engineer BEFORE job bids

for resolution of the question.

G. PVC jackets for insulation shall be in accordance with UL 723 and pertinent flame

spread and smoke developed ratings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE INSULATION

A. Domestic Water Piping

1. All above grade domestic cold and hot water piping shall be insulated, except

that domestic cold water piping in chases with no exterior wall exposure shall

not require insulation. Piping shall be insulated with the following type of

insulation:

a. Half inch (1") thick heavy density UL listed fiberglass insulation with

factory supplied vapor barrier jacketing. Jacketing shall have continuous

pressure sealing lap adhesive for sealing of the longitudinal joint. Butt

strips shall be sized to seal each circumferential joint. Jacket shall have

vapor permeance not greater than 0.02 perm/in. Fittings shall be

insulated with 1" precut fiberglass and molded snap on type PVC jacket

cover having a 25/50 flame/smoke rating. Seal edges of snap-on cover.

B. Condensate Drains

1. One-half inch (1/2’) thick closed cell elastomeric thermal insulation. The

insulation shall be pre-slit longitudinally and pressure-sensitive adhesive for

closure and vapor sealing of the longitudal joint. Insulation shall have flame

spread and smoke developed rating as established by ASTM E84

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. All above insulation shall be applied by an approved insulating Contractor employing

trained insulating personnel.

C. No insulation shall be applied over pipes, fittings or other surfaces which are not clean.


Insulation shall be applied after pipes have been thoroughly tested and proven tight by

the Mechanical Contractor.

D. Insulation shall fit in snug contact with pipe and be installed in accordance with

Manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Stagger joints on layered insulation.

F. Seal joints in insulation.

G. Provide six inch long, 20 gauge galvanized steel sleeve around pipe insulation at each

support.

H. Insulation exposed outside building (where not covered by aluminum jackets) shall have

"slit" seams placed on bottom of pipe and given two coats of white adhesive finish as

recommended by insulation manufacturer.

I. Insulate fittings with sheet insulation and as recommended by Manufacturer where no

other fitting insulation is indicated above.

END OF SECTION

PIPE AND FITTINGS 22 11 16 - 1

SECTION 22 11 16 - PIPE AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE


specified and/or shown or scheduled on plans.

B. Piping shall be in accordance with the following standards:

ANSI B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fitting

ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Pressure Fitting

ANSI B16.24 Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

ANSI B31.5 Refrigeration Piping Errata

ASME/ANSI B16.5 Pipe Fitting and Pipe Flanges

ASME/ANSI B16.26 Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes

ASTM B 32 Solder Metal

ASTM B 42 Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

ASTM B 88 Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM B 306 Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)

ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

ASTM D2665 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and

Vent Pipe and Fittings

ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

IPC International Plumbing Code

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Pipes, fittings, unions, couplings, flanges, gaskets, and other materials and instructions

for the following piping systems.

1. Sanitary waste, vent, and storm drain piping.

2. Domestic water piping.


3. Equipment Drain Piping

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittal data showing product is in compliance with these specifications and

the referenced industry standards.

1.4 All piping installed on this project shall be new and of full weight and size shown and of proper

specification for service intended. Only domestic pipe may be used. When piping is cut, it shall

be reamed with pipe reamer and all burrs, scale, trash and foreign matter removed. Where non-

ferrous piping connects to ferrous piping, install EPCO dielectric couplings.

1.5 Where piping is threaded, dies shall be clean and sharp and joint compound shall be applied to

male end only. All joints shall be made up tight. The caulking of these joints will not be

tolerated. Pipe joint compound must be approved by the Engineer. Copper tubing may be cut

with a tubing cutter or hacksaw with guide.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Provide the specified materials for the following piping systems:

A. Sanitary Waste Piping Below Grade:

1. Sanitary waste piping below grade and outside building shall be PVC pipe

conforming to ASTM D 3034, SDR 35. Jointing shall be accomplished by

means of elastomeric gasket joints conforming to ASTM D 3212. Gasket

materials shall be suitable for use with domestic sewage and shall conform to

ASTM F 477. Pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 2321.

B. Sanitary Waste, Vent, and Storm Drain Piping System inside building

1. Sanitary waste, vent and storm drain piping system inside building shall be

Schedule 40 PVC in accordance with ASTM D 2665.

C. Domestic Water Piping System Inside Building

1. Domestic water piping within the building shall be Type "L" copper in

accordance with ASTM B88 with ANSI B16.18 or ANSI B16.22 soldered joint

fittings or with ASME/ANSI B16.26 flared joint fittings. Provide ASTM B42

copper pipe nipples with threaded end connections. Provide ASTM B32, 95-5

tin-antimony solder, or provide Plumbing Code approved lead-free solder.

D. Equipment Drain Piping

1. Equipment condensate drain shall be Schedule 40 PVC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All piping installed on this project shall be new and of full weight and size shown and of

proper specification for service intended. Only domestic pipe may be used. When

piping is cut, it shall be reamed with pipe reamer and all burrs, scale, trash and foreign


matter removed. Where non-ferrous piping connects to ferrous piping, install EPCO

dielectric couplings.

B. Where piping is threaded, dies shall be clean and sharp and joint compound shall be

applied to male end only. All joints shall be made up tight. The caulking of these joints

will not be tolerated. Pipe joint compound must be approved by the Engineer. Copper

tubing may be cut with a tubing cutter or hacksaw with guide.

C. Copper tubing shall be thoroughly reamed, cleaned with steel wool or emery cloth, and a

non-corrosive flux used before soldering or brazing. Where soldered joints in domestic

water piping are specified, only antimony and lead free solder shall be used. Where

brazed joints are specified, only copper-phosphorous alloys shall be used. Where

unavoidable soldered joints occur below slab on grade, silver solder with minimum 5%

silver content shall be used.

D. Mechanically formed tee connections may be utilized on copper piping systems.

Systems shall be in accordance with ASME B31, ANSI B31.5 and International

Plumbing Code. System shall utilize brazed connections, rather than soldered. Brazed

connections shall be in accordance with Copper Development Association

recommendations.

E. Where welding is specified or done, it shall be by electric arc by mechanics skilled in

operation and holding a test certificate acceptable to the Engineer. All scale and flux

shall be removed from piping after welding.

3.2 STENCILING ON PIPING

A. All piping exposed or concealed shall have the following symbols stenciled on pipe in a

visible location. Stencil shall be attached to pipe every twenty feet (20').

Stencil shall be installed after piping has been painted and/or insulated. Stencil legend

shall be as follows:

Service: Symbol:

Sanitary waste and vent San W.

Domestic cold water DCW

Domestic hot water DHW

B. Install "Direction of Flow" arrow at each stencil.

3.3 Painting of Piping and/or Pipe Insulation

A. After insulation and before stenciling, piping in the following locations shall be painted

by the General Contractor with appropriate direction from the Mechanical Contractor:

1. All piping in equipment rooms.

2. All other exposed piping indoors.

END OF SECTION

DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATERS 22 34 00 - 1

SECTION 22 34 00- DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide domestic water heaters of the electric instantaneous type described herein.

B. Domestic water heaters shall be in accordance with the following industry standards:

UL MH 11050 Domestic Water Heaters

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Domestic Hot Water Heaters (Electric Instantaneous)

A. The water heater(s) shall be as scheduled on drawings.

B. Size and capacity as per plans.

C. Electric heating elements shall be medium watt density with zinc plated copper sheath.

Each element shall be controlled by an individually mounted thermostat and high

temperature cutoff switch.

D. The drain valve shall be located in the front for ease of servicing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Water heater shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 Electric wiring shall be installed in accordance with these specifications.

END OF SECTION

PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM & ACCESSORIES 22 43 10 - 1

SECTION 22 43 10 - PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM & ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE



B. Work Included: Plumbing fixtures, associated trim and fittings necessary to make a

complete installation from wall or floor connections to rough piping, and certain

accessories.

C. Plumbing fixtures, trim and accessories shall be in accordance with the following

industry standards:

ANSI A112.36.2M Cleanouts

ASME A112.6.1M Supports for the Off-the-floor Plumbing

Fixtures for Public Use

ASME A112.18.1M Plumbing Fixture Fittings

ASME/ANSI A112.19.1M Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures

ASME A112.19.2M Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures

ASME A112.19.5 Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, Urinals

ASME A112.21.1M Floor Drains

PDI WH 201 Water Hammer Arrestors

IPC International Plumbing Code

1.2 GENERAL

A. All fixtures must be securely fastened to the floor or walls by means of inserts or

expansion bolts in concrete work, and by means of expansion bolts, toggle bolts in

masonry work, and by means of framing and screws in frame construction, to the

satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Plumber shall install fixtures in accordance with

standard industry practice and manufacturer's instructions. Plumber shall seal around

counter mounted fixtures to provide positive seepage protection.

B. All plumbing fixtures shall be provided complete with all necessary trim including bolt

caps, tail pieces and drains, blank off caps, etc., such that the fixtures are fully functional

and aesthetically complete, whether or not all such parts are specifically listed in the

specifications below. All porcelain or vitreous china fixtures (and related trim) shall be

furnished in white color unless otherwise noted.


1.3 FIXTURE TRIM

A. All plumbing fixture brass trim shall be so designed that all wearing parts are to be in a

standardized renewable operating unit which can be removed without detaching the

supply fixture or faucet proper. The standardized renewable operating units are to be

interchangeable with all supply fixtures and faucets whether quick compression or self-

closing. All exposed metal parts of all fixtures, including faucets, waste fittings, waste

plugs, strainers, flush valves, traps, supplies, nipples and escutcheons shall be chrome

plated brass unless other materials or finish is specified. Angle stops with S.P.S. brass

nipples from wall to stops shall be provided on all water supplies to fixtures. Fixture

trim must be that of the fixture manufacturer wherever possible and must bear a

permanent impression of the manufacturer. No "competitive grade" trim will be

permitted. All tubular waste pipe and fittings under sinks and lavatories shall be 17

gauge chrome plated brass. All p-traps shall have cleanout plugs.

B. SUBMITTALS: Provide submittal data showing product is in compliance with these


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Furnish and install all plumbing fixtures as shown on Plans. Kohler fixtures are specified,

however, Crane, Eljer, or American Standard may be used if they are equal in all respect to those

specified. Contractor shall submit data on trim on well as fixtures. Where Zurn flush valves are

specified, equivalent Delaney models will be the only permitted substitute.

A. Cleanouts

General: Furnish all cleanouts and/or test tees as shown on Plans and required by Code.

Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe they serve, except that 4 inches shall be the

largest size required. Cleanouts shall be provided at the foot of each soil stack and of

each run, change in direction, and mains, not to exceed 50 feet apart inside of building

and 100 feet apart outside of building. Cleanouts shall be as manufactured by Wade, Jay

R. Smith, Zurn, or Josam, and shall be as follows:

1. Inside building- Zurn Model ZN 1400 NH.

2. Outside building where concrete occurs - Zurn Model Z-1400HD-NH.

B. Water Hammer Arresters

1. All water supply piping fittings and fixtures shall be protected against water

hammer, shock or surge pressure by water hammer arresters. Arresters shall

incorporate metal piston. The following schedule for Zurn or Precision

Plumbing Products, arresters shall apply:

P.D.I. Symbol Fixture Unit Ratings

A 1-11

B 12-32

2. Fixture piping shall be adequately anchored to prevent vibration.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


A. Fixtures, trim and accessories shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.

3.2 ROUGH-IN DATA:

A. Where handicapped fixtures are indicated, the following dimensional data shall apply.

Wall Mounted Water Closets - Mount rim at 18" A.F.F.

Wall Mounted Lavatories - Mount so bottom of bowl is 2'-3" A.F.F.

Drinking Fountain - Mount at 2'-3" to bottom of fountain.

Urinals - Mount rim at 17" A.F.F.

B. Where standard fixtures are indicated, follow manufacturer's rough-in instructions.

END OF SECTION

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 13 - 1

SECTION 23 05 13 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE



1.2 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

A. Excavate trenches for underground pipe lines to required depth and provide a separate

trench for each utility sewer and water line except where otherwise noted on drawings.

Lay all pipe in open trench unless noted otherwise on plans. Water lines shall be

installed with a minimum of 48" cover unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

B. After piping has been tested, inspected and approved by the Engineer, and prior to

backfilling, remove forms and clean excavation of trash and debris.

1.3 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated, straight, plumb and as direct as

possible; form right angles or parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to

walls, partitions, ceilings, offset only where necessary to follow walls as directed.

Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space them at distance to permit applying

full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. The Engineer reserves the right

to require this Contractor to make minor changes in pipe locations where conflicts occur

with other trades or equipment. Such changes shall be made without extra cost to the

Owner.

B. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps. Grade drainage

piping at uniform slope of 1/4 inch per foot minimum. Where this is impossible,

maintain slope as directed, but in no case less than 1/8 inch per foot.

C. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Where concealed, provide access doors.

Do not locate any valves with stems below horizontal.

D. Provide water supply, drain and vent connections to equipment specified in other

Sections, requiring such services. Indicated locations and sizes of piping, valves, shall

conform to approved shop drawings and printed installation directions furnished by

equipment manufacturer. Connection sizes shall not be smaller than equipment outlets

for same.

E. Sufficient space shall be allowed in erecting piping for proper application of thermal

insulations including fittings. In no case shall any insulation be cut or reduced in

thickness because of inadequate space.

F. If any piping is found installed without being reamed, cleaned, deburred, etc. or in any

way contrary to above, it shall be sufficient reason for related erected piping to be

removed, inspected by the Engineer, corrected and reinstalled, all at contractor's expense.

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 13 - 2

G. All piping to be of domestic (United States) manufacture and so certified by the

Contractor.

H. In the installation of all pipe runs where shown or where necessary, install expansion

joints as specified or as necessary to allow for expansion. Broken pipe or fittings due to

rigid connections must be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

I. All lines shall be securely anchored where required. Where such anchors occur, they

shall be securely fastened to the structure of the building in a manner approved by the

Engineer. Drawings shall be submitted before installation.

J. Exposed piping passing through walls, floors and ceilings, shall be fitted with

escutcheons. Inside diameter shall fit around insulation or around pipe when not

insulated; outside diameter shall cover sleeve.

1.4 FLASHING

A. Vent pipes passing through roof shall be flashed with 4 pounds lead sheet, at least 20

inches square shall be extended up and turned down inside pipe with pipe at least 12

inches above roof at center line. Vents shall off-set in roof joist area if necessary so that

no vent shall be closer than 4 feet from outside wall line.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and

mechanical appearance when completed. All materials shall be of type, quality and

minimum rating prescribed therein or indicated on the Plans.

3.2 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. This CONTRACTOR shall protect his work at all times from danger by freezing,

breakage, dirt, foreign materials, etc., and shall replace all work so damaged. The

CONTRACTOR shall use every precaution to protect the work of others, and he will be

held responsible for all damage to other work caused by his work or through the neglect

of his workmen.

END OF SECTION

TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 90 - 1

SECTION 23 05 90 - TESTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide all material, equipment and labor required to test and balance all mechanical

systems.

B. Test and Balance Agency Credentials: Test and Balance Agency shall hold current

membership in the Associated Balance Council (AABC). Test and Balance Agency shall

have completed at least five jobs of comparable size and similarity to this project. Test

and Balance Agency job list, credentials and procedures shall be submitted with shop

drawings by Mechanical Contractor for approval by Engineer.

C. Balance procedures required herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the

ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook. Requirements therein shall be as binding as

though full reprinted herein. Test and Balance Agency shall be completely familiar with

the requirements of the ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook. Requirements therein

shall as binding as though full reprinted herein. Test and Balance Agency shall be

completely familiar with the requirements and shall perform each task listed therein on

the required systems. As a minimum, report shall include items required by "Report and

Report Information", plus information on hydronic systems necessary to determine

proper conformance to design requirements, including motor design and operating amps,

and system flows and pressure drops.

D. Procedures required on this job shall be:

Air Side Balancing

Water Side Balancing

Temperature Control Verification

Sound Testing

Vibration Testing

E. Instrumentation used by agency shall be in calibration at time of testing. Required

instruments shall be as listed as a minimum. Accuracy of instruments shall conform to

the following list:

Temperature Indicators + 0.1 degrees F max

Flow Indicators + 10% max

Differential Pressure Gauges + 5% max

Ampere Meters + 3% max

PART 2 - BALANCING OF SYSTEMS

2.1 JOB INSPECTION

A. Testing and Balancing Agency shall act as an authorized inspection agency, responsible

to the Engineer, and shall list all items which require correction or have not been

installed in accordance with contract drawings and/or specifications pertaining to

heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems.


B. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall be given access to the project site at all times

and shall not be required to make prior arrangements with the contractor for site visiting

to perform any balancing work or pre-balancing inspection the Agency may require.

2.2 AIR BALANCE

A. Actual air balancing shall not begin until all systems have been completed, placed into

operation, final filters installed, and all control systems completed and calibrated.

B. Air balance shall include performance ratings of all supply, return and exhaust fan

motors. Fan speeds shall be adjusted to provide design flows, including system

diversities, at actual system pressures. Any drive changes necessary to meet this

requirement shall be provided by the fan manufacturer and installed by the mechanical

contractor under the direct supervision of the Testing and Balancing Agency at no

additional cost to the Owner.

C. Pitot tube traverses of all trunk lines and major branch lines shall be made to determine

proper proportioning of air flows within all systems.

D. Pressure drop readings across all major system components and significant drops within

duct systems shall be reported to determine any deviation between actual and theoretical

value.

E. Accurate flow and pressure measurements shall be made at each terminal device and

each supply, return, or exhaust diffuser. Flow at terminal units and outlets shall be

adjusted by appropriate means to within 10% of design requirements.

F. Outside air, return air, and supply air quantities for all systems shall be adjusted to

within 10% of design requirements.

2.3 CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall have installed and thoroughly checked the action and

calibration of all control devices and placed the entire system into operation.

B. Testing and Balancing Agency shall thoroughly re-check all control sequences, and

calibration of all control devices. Mechanical Contractor shall cooperate with Testing

and Balancing Agency in the re-calibration of set-point readjustment of any control

device he may require.

2.4 VIBRATION TESTING

A. Testing and Balancing Agency shall make a visual inspection of all fans and air handling

units for defects which cause excessive vibration when unit is operating.

B. Vibration isolation on equipment shall be checked for equal deflection and proper

operation.


C. Testing and Balancing Agency shall measure the vibration of each unit with a vibration

meter capable of frequency and amplitude analysis, including displacement and velocity

readouts. Vibration shall be checked against ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook.

If vibration exceeds amount listed therein, mechanical contractor shall take corrective

action.

D. A complete frequency analysis shall be made in areas where vibration amplitude

measurements exceed those specified, in order to determine the cause of the excessive

vibration.

2.5 SOUND TESTING

A. Upon completion of air and water balance requirements and vibration analysis, Testing

and Balancing Agency shall perform all sound measurements and supervise all

correction and/or additions to equipment and materials furnished under this contract so

that sound levels will not exceed those levels specified in various sections of

specifications.

B. Measurements shall be taken with a Type 1 Precision Sound Level Meter, complete with

Octave Band Analyzer which meets ASA Standard 47-83.

C. A complete analysis of all readings including causes for excessive noise levels and

detailed recommendations for the remedy of same shall be included in the final report.

D. Sound testing shall not be completed until vibration analysis has been made and any

necessary corrections have been completed.

E. Sound levels shall not exceed those listed in ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook.

Consult with Engineer if room type is not listed, for specific requirements. Sound levels

shall be recorded for each space, where excess noise is indicated or as requested by the

Engineer, and shall be converted to NC levels.

2.6 OWNER INSTRUCTION

A. Testing and Balancing Agency shall provide neatly typed final reports listing results of

all air balancing as well as vibration and energy projection measurements and

conclusion. Final reports shall be submitted to Architect/Engineer for his approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULING

A. Contractor shall notify Testing and Balancing Agency immediately upon receipt of

contract, the approximate completion date of project.

B. Contractor shall give two weeks prior notice to Agency for testing and balancing

schedule.

C. Contractor shall operate all equipment during each day of testing and balancing as


requested by Testing and Balancing Agency.

D. Contractor shall allow sufficient time in completion schedule for testing and balancing.

3.2 COOPERATION

A. Cooperation among all involved parties is essential to expedite completion of final

testing and balancing. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all jobsite

meetings between testing and balancing personnel and various sub-contractors and

equipment suppliers. Building will not be turned over to the owner until final testing and

balancing reports have been submitted to the engineer and approved.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install through fan manufacturer, any additional drive

change recommended by Testing and Balancing Agency, at no additional cost to the

Owner.

C. Contractor shall install necessary dampers and gauge connections as recommended by

Testing and Balancing Agency to achieve proper balance.

D. Contractor shall install all final filters before final air balancing begins.

E. Contractor shall supply to Testing and Balancing Agency one copy of approved

submittal data, including accurate performance data for all submitted equipment and one

copy of final mechanical drawings and approved control drawings upon receipt of

contract.

F. It is the expressed responsibility of the Testing and Balancing Agency to carry out all

procedures described within these specifications in a professional manner.

G. It is the responsibility of the Testing and Balancing Agency to locate and identify all

current and potential problem areas within the scope of these specifications and to

initiate action by responsible parties to remedy such problems during the testing and

balancing period. Test and Balancing Agency shall fully cooperate with the owner and

Engineer to alleviate problem areas by system adjustment to the full extent that the

system is adjustable.

H. Testing and Balancing Agency shall release no reports until such have been approved by

the Engineer.

3.3 COMPLETION OF WORK

A. Testing and Balancing Agency shall inform contractor as to the extent of completion of

all testing and balancing requirements listed within these specifications.

3.4 ACCEPTANCE

A. Installation shall not be considered complete until final testing and balancing reports

have been submitted to consulting engineer and have been approved by him. One copy

of all final reports shall be given to the Owner's representative after final approval by the


Consulting Engineer.

3.5 WARRANTY

A. Testing and Balancing Agency shall include an extended warranty of three (3) months,

after submission of report during which time the engineer or owner may request a

recheck or resetting of any item included in the report. Should it be found that the

system has not been properly and completely balanced, the warranty period will be

extended until the engineer is completely satisfied.

END OF SECTION

DUCT SYSTEMS INSULATION 23 07 16 - 1

SECTION 23 07 16 - DUCT SYSTEMS INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE



B. Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for HVAC

piping, ductwork and equipment.

C. Industry Standards

D. Insulation systems shall be in accordance with the following industry standards:

ASTM C 195 Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement

ASTM C 547 Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation

ASTM C 553 Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation (Industrial Type)

ASTM C 916 Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 1136 Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM D 828 Tensile Breaking Strength of Paper and Paperboard

ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials


NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation

Systems

NFPA 255 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials


UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

E. Submittals: Provide submittal data showing product is in compliance with these


1.2 GENERAL

A. Insulation shall include all insulating materials, their application, recanvassing after

finish, bands, tie wire, and weather protection for all pipe fittings, valve and equipment

as indicated and as specified herein.

DUCT SYSTEMS INSULATION 23 07 16 - 2

B. Insulation and insulation assemblies shall meet the requirements of International

Building Code (IBC), unless more stringent requirements are listed herein.

C. Concealed insulation shall have a flame spread of 0-75 and a smoke developed of 0-450.

D. Exposed insulation shall have a flame spread of 0-50 and a smoke developed of 0-450.

E. If a material specified herein becomes unavailable, or if there is a question regarding the

required insulating material on this job, insulator shall advise engineer BEFORE job bids

for resolution of the question.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT INSULATION

A. Ductwork shall be insulated on the exterior as follows:

0. All ductwork shall be wrapped with blanket flexible mineral fiber conforming to

ASTM 553, Type 1, Class B-3, 1.0 pounds per cubic foot, 2.0 inches thick.

1. The insulation shall be stapled in place and all joints sealed as per manufacturer's

directions. A copy of said directions shall be furnished the Engineer with shop

drawings on insulation.

2. Duct dimensions indicated are actual metal sizes prior to installation of exterior

insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. All above insulation shall be applied by an approved insulating Contractor employing

trained insulating personnel.

C. No insulation shall be applied over ducts or other surfaces which are not clean.

Insulation shall be applied after surfaces have been thoroughly cleaned.

D. Insulation shall fit in snug contact with pipe and be installed in accordance with

Manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Stagger joints on layered insulation.

F. Seal joints in insulation.

G Insulate fittings with sheet insulation and as recommended by Manufacturer where no

other fitting insulation is indicated above.

END OF SECTION

HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 1

SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Condensate drain piping.

2. Chilled-water piping.


1. Section 2307136 "Duct Insulation."

C. All insulation products shall be Factory Mutual (FM) approved.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor

permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include

dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.


B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive,

mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing

agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply

with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

C. Polyisocyanurate: Unfaced, preformed, rigid cellular polyisocyanurate material intended for

use as thermal insulation.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:




a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Trymer 2000 XP.

b. Duna USA Inc.; Corafoam.

c. Dyplast Products; ISO-25.

2. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"

Article.

D. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or

ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials.



a. Armacell LLC; Tubolit.

b. Nomaco Insulation;

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to its self and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C 1136.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.







B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with

adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe

diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,

valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe

diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable

insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor

barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for

above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket. Match size and color of pipe labels.

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be 1” thick

B. Chilled Water Piping:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be 1” thick

END OF SECTION

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1

SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control

components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 233600 “Air Terminal Units”.

2. Section 237313 “Modular Indoor Air Handling Units.

3. Controls shall be by Trane Co and integrate seamlessly with the existing Trane

automation system (BAS).

4. AHU and zone boxes shall be controlled by the BAS and capable of stand-alone control

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install software in control units. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements

identical to existing plant AHU’s.

B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

2.2 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments.

2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog

instrument.

3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and

instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument

being calibrated.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 2

2.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls.

END OF SECTION

HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and

specialties for the following:

1. Chilled-water piping.

2. Condenser-water piping.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following

minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Chilled-Water Piping: 100 psi at 200 deg F

2. Condenser-Water Piping: 10 psi at 150 deg F


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty

valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as

indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.


B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1

F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,

nuts, and gaskets.

H. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following or equal.

a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. National Fittings, Inc.

c. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products.

d. Victaulic Company.

3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central

cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to

secure grooved pipe and fittings.

1.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

1.8 VALVES

A. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.

2. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.

3. Seat: PTFE.

4. End Connections: Threaded or socket.

5. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.

6. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.

7. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig






1.9 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Basket Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain

connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Chilled-water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings.

B. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges

and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

C. Condenser-water piping, shall bethe following:

1. Schedule 40 CPVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.

2.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection

to each piece of equipment.

2.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and

calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping

as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.


G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for

HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing

of supports.

B. Seismic restraints are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."

C. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet (6 m)

long.

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet

(6 m) or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer,

supported on a trapeze.

D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

2.5 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required

for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only.

Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

2.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment

connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:


1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens.

3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged

joints to isolate equipment.

END OF SECTION

DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 23 31 10 - 1

SECTION 23 31 10 - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide all material, equipment and labor required to complete the installation of

ductwork systems shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Work included: Ductwork systems shall include the following types of systems:

1. Supply, return and exhaust air systems.

2. Flexible supply air systems.

C. Ductwork systems shall be in accordance with the following industry standards:

AMCA 500 Louvers, Dampers and Shutters

AMCA 501 Application Manual for Air Louvers

ASTM A 527/A 527M Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process,

Lock-Forming Quality

ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the

Reverberation Room Method

ASTM C 553 Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation (Industrial Type)

ASTM C 1071 Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Mineral Fiber, Duct Lining

Material)

ASTM E 90 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss

of Building Partitions


NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

SMACNA DCS HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible

UL 181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors

UL 555 Fire Dampers

D. SUBMITTALS

1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data

a. Dampers

b. Acoustical duct lining

c. Flexible ducts and connectors


d. Duct-liner adhesives

e. Diffusers, registers, and grilles

f. Metal ducts

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LOW VELOCITY RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK

A. Steel Ducts: ASTM A 527/A 527M galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality; coating

designation G90. Construction, metal gage, hangers and supports, and reinforcements

shall conform with SMACNA DCS, except that ducts with pressure classifications below

2 inch water gage that are located outside of the conditioned space shall have a seal class

C. Ductwork shall be airtight and shall not vibrate or pulsate when system is in

operation. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as a primary sealant on ductwork

with pressure classifications above one inch water.

B. All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made for beams, columns, pipes,

conduits, iron work or other obstructions in the construction of the building or the work

of other contractors, whether or not the same is shown on these drawings. Where

necessary to avoid beams or other structural systems, piping or conduit, the Contractor

shall divide or curve ductwork to avoid said systems. Ductwork when divided shall

maintain the same cross-sectional areas in accordance with the latest edition of the

ASHRAE Guide.

C. Gauges of galvanized steel shall be as follows:

1. LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

Maximum Size Steel

Inches Gauge Bracing

Up to 12" 26 S slip, drive slip, 1 inch

pocket lock on 8 ft. centers

13" - 18" 24 S slip, drive slip, 2 inch pocket

lock on 8 ft. centers

19" - 30" 24 S slip, 1" pocket lock on 8' centers with

1x1x1/8" angles 4' from joint.

31" - 42" 22 Longitudinal standing seam, 1" standing S cleat,

bar slip, or pocket lock on 4' centers with

1x1x1/8" angles 4' from joint.

43" - 54" 22 Longitudinal standing seam inside 1-1/2"

standing S

D. Turning vanes shall be installed at each elbow and change in direction of supply duct

where shown. Turning vanes shall be a true airfoil design; smoothly rounded entry nose

with extending trailing edge. Generated sound power level shall not exceed 54 dB in the

third octave band at 2000 fpm duct velocity. Vane spacing shall be 2.4 inches on center

across the full diagonal dimension of the elbow. Vanes shall be as manufactured by

Aero/Dyne Co., High Efficiency Profile model with factory side rails, or approved equal.

E. Ductwork shall be connected to air handling devices supply return and outdoor air

connections by flexible connectors. Connector shall be Dura-Dyne Type DPN or


approved equal waterproof and fireproof fabric. Flexible connections shall be at least

five inches (5") long and securely fastened with galvanized band iron hoops.

F. Hard Cast DT-Tape with FTA-20 adhesive shall be applied to each duct joint and point

of attachment of duct hanger. Samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

2.2 LOW VELOCITY ROUND DUCTWORK

A. All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made for beams, columns, pipes,

conduits, iron work or other obstructions in the construction of the building or the work

of other contractors, whether or not the same is shown on these drawings. Where

necessary top avoid beams or other structural systems, piping or conduit, the Contractor

shall divide or curve ductwork to avoid said systems. Ductwork when divided shall

maintain the same cross-sectional areas in accordance with the latest edition of the

ASHRAE Guide.

B. Gauges of galvanized steel shall be as follows:

1. LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

Maximum Size Steel

Inches Gauge

Up to 8" 28

9" - 14" 26

15" - 26" 24

27" - 36" 22

2. Ductwork shall be longitudinal seam, snap lock type, with aluminized duct tape

applied over entire length of longitudinal and circumferential seams. Ductwork

shall be externally insulated.

C. Ductwork shall be connected to air handling devices supply return and outdoor air

connections by flexible connectors. Connector shall be Dura-Dyne Type DPN or

approved equal waterproof and fireproof fabric. Flexible connections shall be at least

five inches (5") long and securely fastened with galvanized band iron hoops.

D. Furnish and install manually operated volume control dampers in all branches, splits, or

at all supply air, return air, exhaust or transfer openings where necessary for proper

balancing of air distribution. Dampers shall be of single blade type. Dampers shall have

a quadrant type indicating device wtih lock to hold damper in position for proper setting.

Damper shall be as Ruskin CDRS-25.

2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Flexible ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with UL 181, Class 1, SMACNA

DCS and additional requirements herein specified. Provide to connect between rigid

ductwork and air diffusion devices. There shall be no erosion, delamination, loose

fibers, or odors from the ducts into the air stream.

B. Flexible ductwork shall be satisfactory for operating pressure up to 6 inches water gauge.

C. Insulated flexible ductwork shall be constructed with alumininized mylar laminated to a


corrosion resistant steel wire helix. Duct shall be insulated with one inch (1") thickness

of fiberglass insulation having a density of 1 lb./cu. ft. Sheathe insulation with a vapor

barrier having a maximum water vapor permeance of 0.20 perm in accordance with

ASTM E96, Procedure A. Coat ends of insulation with cement to prevent erosion and

delamination.

D. Maximum length of flexible ductwork shall not exceed 6'-0".

E. Flexible ducts shall be suspended on 36 inch centers with a minimum 3/4 inch wide flat

banding material. All joints and connections shall be made with 1/2 inch wide positive

locking steel straps.

2.4 CASINGS AND PLENUMS

A. Factory fabricated components with field installation. Furnish certified testing data from

plenum or casing manufacturer obtainable directly from an independent acoustical

laboratory, listing sound absorption and transmission loss characteristics of panel

assembly. Sound absorption coefficients and sound transmission loss, determined by an

independent laboratory, shall be in accordance with ASTM C 423 and ASTM E 90

respectively.

2.5 DAMPERS AND OPERATORS

A. Furnish and install manually operated volume control dampers in all branches, splits, or

at all supply air, return air, exhaust or transfer openings where necessary for proper

balancing of air distribution. Dampers shall be of opposed blade type. Dampers shall

have a quadrant type indicating device with lock to hold damper in position for proper

setting. Damper shall be as Ruskin MD-35.

B. Damper blades shall be constructed of 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel. Blades to be

of single unit design with EPDM edge seals. Jamb shall have flexible metal seal.

C. Frame shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel hat channel with corner braces, and shall

incorporate nylon bearings.

D. Operator shall open damper when fan is energized and shall close when fan is de-

energized.

2.6 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

A. Material and Finishes: Provide factory-furnished diffusers, registers, and grilles

constructed of aluminum. Exterior and exposed edges shall be rolled, or otherwise

stiffened and rounded. Colors shall be selected by Owner.

B. Sound Pressure Level: Manufacturer certified sound pressure level ratings of inlets and

outlets. Conform with the following permissible room sound pressure levels:

NC Range, dB Typical Application

30 - 35 Office or Laboratory Area


C. Throw: The distance from the diffuser, register or grille to the point which the air

velocity falls below 50 feet per minute shall not exceed 1.5 times the outlet mounting

height.

D. Drop: Maximum drop of air stream shall not be within 5 feet of the floor at the end of

the throw.

E. Ceiling Diffusers: Equip with baffles or other devices required to provide proper air

distribution pattern as indicated. Provide factory-fabricated, single key, volume

dampers. Except for linear diffusers, internal parts shall be removable through the

diffuser neck for access to the duct and without the use of special tools.

F. Square Diffusers: Construct each ceiling diffuser of four or more concentric elements

designed to deliver air in a generally horizontal direction without excess smudging of the

ceiling. Interior elements of square and rectangular ceiling diffusers may be circular,

square, or rectangular as manufacturer's standard.

G. Return Air and Exhaust Air Grilles

1. Celing Type Grilles

a. Grilles shall be 1/2" by 1/2" grid opening of aluminum construction.

Grille shall be surface mounted. Grille shall be white finish. Size and

capacity shall be as indicated on Plans.

2.7 DUCT SLEEVES, PREPARED OPENINGS, AND CLOSURE COLLARS

A. Duct Sleeves: Fabricate from minimum 20-gauge galvanized steel. Where sleeves are

installed in bearing walls, provide structural steel sleeves as indicated. Size sleeves to

provide one-inch clearance between duct and sleeve or between insulation and sleeve for

insulated ducts.

B. Prepared Openings: Provide one-inch clearance between the duct and the sleeve, or one-

inch clearance between insulation and sleeve for insulated ducts except at grilles,

registers, and diffusers.

C. Packing: ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2, mineral fiber.

D. Closure Collars: Four inches wide minimum, fabricated from minimum 20 gauge

galvanized steel.

2.8 DEFLECTORS

A. Factory-fabricated and factory or field-assembled units consisting of curved turning

vanes or scoop type extractors for uniform air distribution and change of direction with

minimum turbulence and pressure loss. Provide curved vanes for square elbows.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


Conform to NFPA 90A and SMACNA DCS. Provide mounting and supporting of ductwork and

accessories including, but not limited to, structural supports, hangers, vibration isolators, stands,

clamps and brackets, access doors, and dampers. Provide electrical isolation between dissimilar

metals. Electrical isolation may be fluorinated elastomers or sponge-rubber gaskets. Install

ductwork accessories as indicated and as recommended by manufacturer's printed instruction.

Allow clearance for inspection, repair, replacement, and service. Louvers in accordance with

AMCA 501.

A. Ductwork: Air distribution systems shall operate with no chatter or vibration.

1. Field Changes to Ductwork: Those required to suite the sizes of factory-

fabricated equipment actually furnished, shall be designed to minimize

expansion and contraction. Use gradual transitions in field changes as well as

modifications to connecting ducts. Provide jumper ducts for discharging air into

duct junctions as indicated.

2. Dampers: When installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, equip each damper

operator with stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters to provide

clearance between the duct and operator not less than the thickness of insulation.

Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or standard

accessory of damper manufacturer.

3. Deflectors: Provide in square elbows, duct-mounted supply outlets, take-off or

extension collars to supply outlets, and tap-in branch-off connections. Adjust

supply outlets to provide air volume and distribution as indicated or specified.

4. Fire Dampers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for

condition of UL 555 and NFPA 90A. Locate as indicated and provide surface

penetration sleeves in accordance with approved detail drawings.

5. Access Doors: Provide for automatic dampers, volume dampers, fire dampers,

coils, thermostats, temperature controllers, valves, filters, humidifiers and other

concealed apparatus requiring service and inspection in the duct systems.

6. Duct Sleeves, Prepared Openings, and Closure Collars: Provide for ductwork

penetrations in floors, walls, and partitions through which metallic ductwork

passes.

a. Duct Sleeves: Fill space between duct and sleeve or between insulation

and sleeve for insulated ducts with mineral fiber, except at grilles,

registers, and diffusers.

b. Prepared Openings: Fill space between duct and opening or between

insulation and opening for insulated ducts with mineral fiber, except at

grilles, registers, and diffusers.

c. Closure Collars: Fit collars snugly around ducts or insulation. Grind

edges of collar smooth to preclude tearing or puncturing insulation

covering or vapor barrier. Provide nails with maximum 6-inch centers

on collars.

B. Ductwork Hangers and Supports: Ductwork hangers and supports shall be in accordance

with SMACNA DCS, Section 4. Attach supports only to structural framing members

and concrete slabs. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means is provided

and approved for preventing the anchors from puncturing the metal decking. Where

supports are required between structural framing member, provide suitable intermediate

metal framing.

1. Flexible Ducts: Support ducts by hangers every 3 feet, unless supported by


ceiling construction. Stretch flexible air ducts to smooth out corrugations and

long radius elbows. Provide minimum length to make connections.

2. Flexible Connectors: Provide flexible connectors between fans and ducts or

casings and where ducts are of dissimilar metals. For round ducts, securely

fasten flexible connectors by zinc-coated steel clinch-type drawbands. For

rectangular ducts, lock flexible connectors to metal collars.

3. Inspection Plates and Test Holes: Provide, where required, in ductwork or

casings for all balance measurements. If possible, test holes should be located at

least 7.5 times diameters downstream from a disturbance. Extend cap through

insulation.

4. Cleaning of Ducts: Remove all debris and dirt from ducts and wipe clean.

Before installing air outlets, force air through entire system at maximum

attainable velocity to remove accumulated dust. Provide temporary air filters to

protect ductwork which may be harmed by excessive dirt. For large systems,

clean duct with high power vacuum machines.


Administer and direct tests. Furnish instruments, equipment, connecting devices, and personnel

for the tests. Notify Contracting Officer 14 days before inspection or testing is scheduled.

Correct defects in work. Repeat tests until work is in compliance.

3.3 TESTING AND BALANCING

Perform testing and balancing on ductwork systems in accordance with Section 23 05 90.

END OF SECTION

EXHAUST FANS 233420- 1

SECTION 23 34 20 - EXHAUST FANS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide all material, equipment and labor required to complete the installation of exhaust fans

shown on drawings and specified herein.

B. Exhaust systems shall be in accordance with NFPA 90A.

C. Exhaust fans shall be in accordance with the following industry standards:

AMCA 210 Testing Fans for Rating

AMCA 300 Certified Sound Ratings Program for Air Moving Devices

NEMA MG1 Motors and Generators

NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems

SMACNA DCS HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible

UL 507 Electric Fans

1.2 Fan curbs on roof mounted fans shall be provided by fan manufacturer, and shall be flashed by

roofing contractor. See details on mechanical plans for special curbs. Fan curbs shall be of

welded galvanized steel construction with osmose treated wood nailing strips, fiberglass

insulation, and damper tray when dampers are required. Curbs shall be provided suitable for roof

type as detailed on architectural plans with extensions and/or pitch as required for level

installation of fans. Curbs shall be suitable for fan style, weight and proper installation. Curbs

shall be secured to roof deck (below any surface insulation). Fan details on plans shall not be

construed to infer any details of roof construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.3 BELT DRIVE ROOF MOUNTED FANS

A. Fan shall be of the belt driven centrifugal type. Construction of fan housing shall be heavy gauge

spun aluminum, mounted upon a rigid support and birdscreen network of poly-vinyl-chloride

coated steel. The fan inlet shall have spun venturi throat overlapped by a backward curved

centrifugal wheel with spun cone for maximum performance.

B. The motor and drive housing shall be mounted on vibration isolators and shall be completely

sealed from the exhaust air.

C. The entire drive assembly and wheel shall be removable through the support structure without

dismantling the fan housing.

D. The wheel shaft shall be mounted in heavy duty ball bearing pillow blocks, equipped with grease


fittings. Both pulleys shall be fully machined cast iron type, keyed to the wheel and motor

shafts.

E. Fan shall have disconnect inside fan housing. Fan shall have backdraft damper.

F. Capacity and characteristics shall be as indicated on Plans. The fan shall bear the A.M.C.A. Seal

for rated sound and capacity.

G. As Greenheck Model specified, or approved equal.

2.4 ABOVE CEILING EXHAUST FAN

A. Fan shall be mounted above ceiling and vent routed through roof to roof cap, or wall to

weatherproof wall louver as shown on plans. Wall louvers shall have rain stop in collar and shall

be aluminum. Roof caps shall be spun aluminum with curb. Caps and louvers shall be provided

with fans. Fan shall have forward curved wheel constructed of aluminum. Fan motor shall be of

the shaded pole type. Housing shall be of steel construction with baked enamel finish. Fan shall

have plug type disconnect. Fan shall have integral backdraft damper.

B. Capacity and characteristics as indicated.

C. As Greenheck Model specified, or approved equal.

2.4 LAB UTITLITY VENT SET

A. Greenheck, or approved equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Provide storage for equipment and materials at the project site. Parts shall be readily accessible

for inspection, repair, and renewal. Protect materials and equipment from weather.

3.2 FANS

Install with resilient mountings, flexible electrical leads, and flexible connections between fan

inlet and discharge ductwork. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance and safety

screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.


Schedule and administer specified tests. Provide personnel, instruments, and equipment for such

tests. Correct defects and repeat the respective inspection and tests. Give the Contracting

Officer ample notice of the dates and times scheduled for tests and trial operations. Conduct

inspection and testing in the presence of the Contracting Officer.

A. Inspection: Prior to initial operation, inspect equipment installation for conformance with

drawings and specifications.


3.4 TESTING AND BALANCING

Test and balance each exhaust system in accordance with Section 23 05 90, "Testing and

Balancing."

END OF SECTION

AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 1

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. single-duct air terminal units.


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and

stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible"

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities, furnished

specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories.

1. Air terminal units.

2. Liners and adhesives.

3. Sealants and gaskets.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.6 SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a

protective metal shroud.

B. Casing: 0.034-inch double wall.

C. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.


1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg

inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open

D. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and

hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with primary automatic, and

secondary manual, reset thermal cutouts. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked

terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.

1. Access door interlocked disconnect switch.

2. Downstream air temperature sensor with local connection to override discharge-air

temperature to not exceed a maximum temperature set point (adjustable.)

3. Nickel chrome 80/20 heating elements.

4. Airflow switch for proof of airflow.

5. Fan interlock contacts.

6. Fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection (for coils more than 48 A).

7. Mercury contactors.

8. Pneumatic-electric switches and relays.

9. Magnetic contactor for each step of control (for three-phase coils).

E. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based thermostat with

integral airflow transducer and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with exiting

Trane BAS.

1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, spring return open.

2. Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and maximum

air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat within 5 percent of set

point while compensating for inlet static-pressure variations up to 4-inch wg (1000 Pa);

and shall have a multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet.

3. Thermostat: Wall-mounted electronic type with temperature set-point display in

Fahrenheit and Celsius.

F. Direct Digital Controls: Single-package unitary controller and actuator capable of stand-alone

operation or BAS operation.

1.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and

maintenance.


C. Install wall-mounted thermostats.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum

factory-set airflows.

END OF SECTION

MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313 - 1

SECTION 237313 - MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Variable-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units.


A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance

requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of withstanding 133

percent of internal static pressures indicated.


A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.

1. Unit dimensions and weight.

2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.

3. Fans:

a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.

c. Fan construction and accessories.

d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

6. Filters with performance characteristics.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.



A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One

2. Fan Belts: One


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-

handling units and components.

C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to

ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support members, if any, with actual

equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Trane Equipment.

2.2 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint.

2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets.

3. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant.

4. Factory Finish for Steel Casings: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately

after cleaning and pretreating.

5. Factory Finish for Casings: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish, consisting of prime coat and

thermosetting topcoat.

6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.


B. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:

1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, single- or double-wall and insulated

panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing.

2. Inspection and Access Panels:

a. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement

shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's

internal components.

3. Access Doors:

a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and

two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to

be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

4. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Section: Doors

b. Access Section: Doors.

c. Coil Section: access panel.

d. Damper Section: Doors.

e. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of

filters.

f. Mixing Section: Doors.

g. Humidifier Section: Doors.

5. Service Light: 100-W vaporproof fixture with switched junction box located outside

adjacent to door.

C. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from

cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from

humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection.

a. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with

ASHRAE 62.1

b. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.

2.3 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous

operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

1. Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor

horsepower, and with field-adjustable alignment.


B. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with 1.5

service factor based on fan motor.

C. Variable Frequency Controllers:

1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and

arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase induction

motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

2. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency

throughout voltage range

3. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

a. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.

b. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.

c. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.

d. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.

e. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.

4. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

a. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.

b. Undervoltage and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload, and

overcurrent trips.

c. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a

natural frequency of the combination.

d. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.

e. Loss-of-phase protection.

f. Reverse-phase protection.

g. Short-circuit protection.

h. Motor overtemperature fault.

5. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of

power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction.

Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in

either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to

controller, motor, or load.

6. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power

interruption until motor has stopped.

7. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times

the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

8. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based

on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at

slow speeds.

9. Door-mounted LED status lights shall indicate the following conditions:

a. Power on.

b. Run.

c. Overvoltage.

d. Line fault.

e. Overcurrent.

f. External fault.


10. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with

manual-speed-control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.

11. Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller door

and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:

a. Output frequency (Hertz).

b. Motor speed (rpm).

c. Motor status (running, stop, fault).

d. Motor current (amperes).

e. Motor torque (percent).

f. Fault or alarming status (code).

g. Proportional-integral-derivative (PID) feedback signal (percent).

h. DC-link voltage (volts direct current).

i. Set-point frequency (Hertz).

j. Motor output voltage (volts).

12. Control Signal Interface:

a. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-

20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs.

b. Remote signal inputs capable of accepting any of the following speed-setting input

signals from the control system:

1) 0 to 10-V dc.

2) 0-20 or 4-20 mA.

3) Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.

4) Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.

5) RS485.

6) Keypad display for local hand operation.

c. Output signal interface with a minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20 mA),

which can be programmed to any of the following:

1) Output frequency (Hertz).

2) Output current (load).

3) DC-link voltage (volts direct current).

4) Motor torque (percent).

5) Motor speed (rpm).

6) Set-point frequency (Hertz).

d. Remote indication interface with a minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V

ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

1) Motor running.

2) Set-point speed reached.

3) Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent).

4) High- or low-speed limits reached.

13. Communications: RS485 interface allows VFC to be used with an external system within

a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFC to be


programmed via the facilities existing Trane Building automation system. Provide

capability for VFC to retain these settings within the nonvolatile memory.

14. Accessories:

a. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless otherwise

indicated.

b. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-

duty type.

c. Standard Displays:

1) Output frequency (Hertz).

2) Set-point frequency (Hertz).

3) Motor current (amperes).

4) DC-link voltage (volts direct current).

5) Motor torque (percent).

6) Motor speed (rpm).

7) Motor output voltage (volts).

2.4 COIL SECTION

A. General Requirements for Coil Section:

1. Comply with ARI 410.

2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to

allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil.

3. For multizone units, provide air deflectors and air baffles to balance airflow across coils.

4. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.

5. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate coil section, internal mounting frame and

attachment to coils, and other coil section components with reinforcement strong enough

to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls

for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when coil-mounting frame and air-handling-unit

mounting frame are anchored to building structure.

B. Electrical Heating Coils, Controls, and Accessories: Comply with UL 1995.

1. Casing Assembly: Slip-in type with galvanized-steel frame.

2. Sheathed Heating Elements: Coiled resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent

chromium surrounded by compacted magnesium-oxide powder in tubular-steel sheath;

with spiral-wound, copper-plated, steel fins continuously brazed to sheath.

3. Open Heating Elements: Resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium

supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings,

fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized-steel frame.

4. Overtemperature Protection: Disk-type, automatically resetting, thermal-cutout, safety

device; serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from coil section.

5. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually resetting or manually replaceable,

thermal cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage.

6. Control Panel: Unit or Remote mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent

protection.


2.5 AIR FILTRATION SECTION

A. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A.

2. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency

reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors

on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access

plenum.

B. Disposable Panel Filters:

1. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.

2. Thickness: 2 inches

3. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 8

4. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive

5. Frame: Galvanized steel, with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side,

hinged, and with pull and retaining handles.

2.6 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. As shown on drawings

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation.

Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and

electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases using elastomeric pads

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and

air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally

to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers,

coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.

END OF SECTION

PROJECT CLOSE OUT 23 95 00 - 1

SECTION 23 95 00 - PROJECT CLOSE OUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 TESTS

A. This Contractor shall conduct such tests as required to determine that systems and

equipment which he installs conform to Specifications. Contractor shall supply all labor,

materials, instruments, operations, etc., required to facilitate testing. Gauges,

thermostats, and instruments used in testing shall be accurate, recently calibrated and

approved by the Engineer prior to test. Instruments installed permanently in systems as

specified hereinbefore may be used in testing when approved by the Engineer. Engineer

shall be notified when tests are to take place. If Engineer is not notified, Engineer may

require test to be repeated. Tests shall be as follows:

1. Upon completion of the various systems, this Contractor shall set and adjust all

valves, dampers, controllers, thermostats, etc.

2. Each and every phase of the heating and ventilating system shall be operated for

a sufficient period of time to demonstrate to the entire satisfaction of the

Engineer, the ability of the system to meet the capacity and performance

requirements.

1.2 FILTER CLEANING

A. No air handling equipment shall be operated during any stage of construction, cleanup or

testing without filters.

B. All filters on air handling equipment shall be new and unused and shall be installed by

time mechanical construction is accepted and taken over for operation by the Owner.

1.3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. All equipment and systems shall be tested as hereinbefore specified.

B. Furnish a competent mechanic to supervise the starting, adjusting and testing of all

equipment and to train the operator in the operation of the system. Where specified,

certain major items of equipment shall be installed under the supervision of and tested by

a specialist furnished by the manufacturer of the equipment. Such specialist shall train

the operator in the use of his equipment.

C. Contractor shall furnish three (3) copies of operating and maintenance instructions for

each and every piece of equipment supplied by him together with four (4) copies of spare

parts lists including model numbers and serial numbers. Information to be neatly bound

in three ring binders, indexed, and labeled for each piece of equipment. Contractor will

spend sufficient time with the operator to acquaint him with the complete operations of

the system. Provide framed, glass enclosed, typewritten instructions, easily read,

explaining exactly the procedure to be followed in starting up, and in shutting down the

systems for each of the various control cycles. Operators, such as switches, pushbuttons,

changeovers, etc., shall be numbered and referred to by number and function in the

operating instructions. The manuals shall be transmitted to Physical Plant at least one

month prior to the completion of the work. Also, the names and addresses of all

PROJECT CLOSE OUT 23 95 00 - 2

subcontractors shall be listed in the front of the manual.

END OF SECTION

Project Elm - Office Expansion & Upfit Warner Nease Bost Architects, Inc.Lewiston, Pennsylvania August 19, 2016

ELECTRICAL GENERAL 260100 - 1

SECTION 260100 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. All work shall conform to the latest editions of the National Electrical Code (NEC) [NationalFire Protection Association (NFPA) 70], the Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace(NFPA 70E), the Life-Safety Code (NFPA 101), the International Building Code, theAmericans with Disabilities Act, and all other applicable federal, state, and local codes andregulations.

B. All work shall be performed in strict compliance with NFPA 70E. Submission of bid shallstand as an agreement by the Contractor to indemnify and hold harmless the Engineer andOwner from all liability related to damage and/or injury to personnel and equipment during theinstallation of the project.

C. The contract documents are schematic in nature and are intended to convey the intent of theelectrical work to be performed on this project. Provide all material, labor, equipment, etc.,necessary to provide complete and operable electrical systems.

D. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Information toBidders, and all other parts of this set of Contract Documents are hereby adopted and areapplicable to the Division 260000 Contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Visit site prior to bid. Devise a plan for installation of complete and operable electrical systemsmeeting the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. Submission of Bid stands asevidence that the Contractor accepts the Contract Documents as sufficient and complete for thework to be performed. Notify the engineer at least two weeks prior to bid of any discrepanciesbetween the Contract Documents and actual field conditions. No change orders will be granteddue to existing conditions that could have been observed during a site visit.

B. Provide temporary power and lighting during construction. Coordinate with the GeneralContractor for the exact requirements.

C. Electrical switchgear and panelboard layouts are based on sizes of Square D equipment.Equipment manufactured by General Electric, Siemens, and Cutler Hammer are equallyacceptable. However, the Electrical Contractor is responsible for selecting and furnishing gearthat will fit in the spaces provided and shall be responsible for arranging the gear to meet therequired code clearances. Regardless of the manufacturer, the Electrical Contractor shallprovide a drawn-to-scale electrical layout with the equipment brochures for all rooms in whichpanelboards, motor control centers, switchboards, or switchgear are placed. The drawings shallinclude the work of all other trades including mechanical system piping, ductwork, sprinklerpiping, etc. No conduits shall be installed until layouts have been approved.

D. Locate junction boxes, pull boxes, disconnects, and other equipment requiring access in such amanner that they are accessible at the end of construction. Notify the Architect where it isimpossible to plan conduit routing or equipment placement in such a manner, and provide thenecessary access panels in the ceiling or wall as required. The access panel type and style shall



be subject to the Architect’s approval. Employ a painter to provide the appropriate coatings asdirected by the Architect.

E. Relocate, or recircuit, all electrical equipment, conduit, and circuitry conflicting with orobstructing work on this project. Where the electrical systems are owned by other entities, paythem to relocate, or recircuit, their facilities.

F. Arrange for connection of service to all electrical systems by the appropriate utility company.Coordinate completely with all utility company requirements even if they are different than thecontract documents. If utility company requirements are different from the contract documents,notify the engineer at least ten days prior to bid. Pay all utility company charges necessary forinstallation and connection of service. If the cost of the service is unavailable at the time of bid,submit a letter to the General Contractor, signed by the appropriate utility company official,stating that the cost has not been determined. The General Contractor shall submit this letterwith his bid. The cost will then become the Owner’s responsibility.

G. Provide all necessary equipment, raceway, circuitry, fittings, lugs, terminations, labor, etc. andconnect to all equipment and appliances requiring electrical connections furnished herein, bythe Owner, or by other Contractors. Prior to ordering electrical equipment and roughing in forequipment furnished by the Owner or other Contractors, verify all connection types, connectionlocations, connection heights, voltages, number of phases, conductor sizes, disconnectingmeans, breaker sizes, etc. Furnish the proper electrical equipment for the equipment actuallybeing supplied.

1.3 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Within 30 days after award of Contract and prior to beginning work, provide six bound copiesof manufacturers’ cut sheets containing information concerning each article of electricalequipment to be furnished on this project. These cut sheets shall contain sufficient informationto prove compliance with the contract documents. Information addressing the requirements ofthe contract documents shall be highlighted. Each bound set shall bear the stamp of theElectrical Contractor as well as the General Contractor.

B. Within 30 days after award of Contract and prior to beginning work, provide six sets of full sizeshop drawings showing exact equipment locations with all equipment drawn to scale. Show allraceways with their junction boxes and pull boxes. Show all connection types, locations, andheights to equipment. Provide mounting and support details for all raceways and equipment.Coordinate with all other trades to ensure that there are no conflicts between systems. Each setof shop drawings shall bear the stamp of the Electrical Contractor, the General Contractor, andall Project Sub-Contractors. Failure to submit these Shop Drawings will render the ElectricalContractor responsible for resolving all conflicts between trades at his own expense.

C. Submittals and Shop Drawings are reviewed to determine quality of materials. Approval ofsubmittals and shop drawings does not relieve the Contractor of meeting the requirements andintent of the Contract Documents.

D. Outlet, light fixture, and device locations are shown in their approximate locations on thedrawings. Coordinate with Architectural drawings to get final locations. Mount all electricaloutlets shown at counters such that the bottom of the box is two inches above the backsplash orsix inches above a counter with no backsplash. The Owner reserves the right to relocate



outlets, light fixtures, and devices a distance not to exceed twenty feet prior to the installationof outlet boxes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 All electrical equipment and materials shall be new. All equipment and materials shall be stored onthe job site in weatherproof enclosures. Electronic equipment shall be stored in facilities where thetemperature and humidity are controlled. In addition, comply completely with all manufacturers’requirements for storage and handling.

2.2 All equipment shall be UL listed for the application in which it is used and shall be labeled asevidence of its UL listing.

2.1 Each branch circuit and multiwire branch circuit shall be run with its own neutral conductorcomplying with NEC article 200.4.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

All work shall be performed with an emphasis on neatness. The Engineer, Architect, and Ownerretain the right to reject work that is, in their judgment, unsatisfactory.

3.2 EXPERIENCE

The Contractor shall have completed at least two jobs of similar size and scope within the past fiveyears. The Engineer reserves the right to reject Contractors based on their inability to submitevidence of their experience, or based on experience with the Contractor on previous projects.

3.3 PERMITS

Obtain and pay for all permits required for work.

3.4 FIREPROOFING

A. Fireproof all penetrations through firewalls with a fireproofing compound listed to maintain therating of the wall through which the raceway passes.

B. The firestopping caulk shall be a one-part, intumescent, latex elastomer. The caulk shall becapable of expanding a minimum of 3 times at 1000°F. The material shall be thixotropic and beapplicable to overhead, vertical and horizontal firestops. The caulk shall be listed byindependent test agencies such as UL or FM and be tested to, and pass the criteria of, ASTM E814 Fire Test, tested under positive pressure. It shall comply with the requirements of the NEC(NFPA-70), BOCA, ICBO, SBCCI and NFPA Code 101. Firestopping caulk shall be paintable,but shall be non-hardening. Firestopping caulk shall be 3M Firebarrier CP or approved equal.

C. The fireproofing materials shall be installed by individuals certified to perform such work.Submit evidence of personnel certifications with electrical equipment brochures.



D. Where cable trays are shown crossing firewalls, terminate the cable tray on each side of thewall and run the conductors through conduits installed in the wall. Fireproof around theconductors after installation.

E. Provide mineral wool packing and all other materials recommended by the manufacturer for acomplete installation.

3.5 FLASHING

Provide all necessary equipment and flash all roof penetrations in such a manner to ensure that allpenetrations are completely sealed and all roof warranties remain in effect. Where there are noroof warranties, the Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the electrical penetrations against leakingfor a period of one year from project completion. Employ a professional roofing contractor toperform all flashing.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Keep energized equipment covered during all phases of construction. Use enclosures, doors,covers, etc., to ensure that neither personnel nor machinery contact live electrical equipment.

B. Replace electrical equipment that is damaged during construction.

3.7 DAMAGED FACILITIES

Locate all existing site equipment and utilities prior to beginning construction. Repair allequipment and utilities damaged during construction, or pay for the repair of the equipment andutilities where required by the Owner of the damaged facilities.

3.8 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Excavate in such a manner as to minimize erosion of the soil. Backfill trenches aroundconduits with fine sand that is free of rocks, clods, and debris. Fill sand a minimum of 4” overconduits. Backfill the rest of the trench in six inch increments, wetted, and tamped. Finalcompaction shall be a minimum of 95% of that of the adjacent earth. Resurface the grade withthe same material as that excavated from the grade whether it be paving, concrete, sod, etc.Repair work shall be comparable to the quality of the original site prior to excavation.

B. Provide a 3” wide plastic labeled marker tape 12” below grade over all electrical conduitsburied underground. Tapes for power circuits shall have a warning such as “Caution: BuriedElectrical Line Below.” Labels on tapes for telephone, data, cable television, and otherfacilities shall adequately describe the line over which they are buried.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label all switchboards, panelboards, motor starters, disconnects, and motor control centersfurnished under Division 260000 and other divisions of this contract with engraved rigid plasticnameplates having letters at least ¼ inch high. Nameplates shall be bolted to the enclosure. Alllabels shall indicate the voltage, number of phases, the AIC rating, and the panelboard andcircuit number from which the device is fed.

B. All circuit breakers in Switchboards, Motor Control Centers, Square D



I-Line, and similar panelboards shall be labeled with plastic nameplates (as described in Part A)providing the name of the load served and the ampacity and number of poles of the breaker.

C. All Square D NQ, NF and similar panelboards shall have typewritten circuit directories.

D. Label all conductors at all junction boxes, pull boxes, and terminations with typewrittenadhesive markers indicating the panelboard or switchboard name and circuit number of theconductor. Labels shall be Brady Datatab or approved equal.

E. Label all junction boxes and pull boxes with stenciled painted letters containing the name of thepanelboard and circuit numbers of the circuits contained within. Use black paint for normalcircuits, red paint for emergency circuits, and orange paint for fire alarm circuits. TheContractor may select other colors for junction boxes and pull boxes for auxiliary systems.

F. Label all conduits in the most likely direction of access and view every 50’ and on both ends ofeach bend with stenciled painted letters containing the name of the panelboard and circuitnumbers of the circuits contained within. Use black paint for normal circuits, red paint foremergency circuits, and orange paint for fire alarm circuits. The Contractor may select othercolors for conduits for auxiliary systems.

3.10 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

Maintain one set of drawings during construction for as-built markings. Mark these drawingsin red to indicate field changes. Provide these drawings to the Engineer at the end of theconstruction process. Where required under the General Conditions, Special Conditions, orother portions of this contract, provide revised computer drawn as-built drawings to theEngineer at the end of construction.

3.11 TESTING

A. A third party testing agency shall be employed as required to test all systems for compliancewith the requirements of all regulatory agencies and these specifications. See the individualspecifications and/or the electrical testing specification 264800 for requirements.

B. Provide three bound copies of all test results to the Engineer at the end of the constructionprocess. No Recommendation of Substantial Completion will be granted until all testingreports have been submitted.

3.12 WARRANTY

Provide the Owner a written guarantee to repair, or replace, all faulty equipment and systemsfor a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion. During this one-year period, arepresentative of the Contractor shall be on the site actively working on the repairs within 24hours of the Owner’s telephone call. During this period of time, the Owner shall not becharged for any repair work or expenses related with the repair work unless the Contractor canprove that the Owner has damaged the equipment or system.



WORK IN EXISTING FACILITIES 260500 - 1


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. All work shall be scheduled and coordinated through the General Contractor with the Owner.Provide necessary costs for all work during both normal and premium work hours in bid.

B. Provide continuous uninterrupted power to all existing facilities to remain during the entireconstruction process. Any required power outages must be scheduled and approved by theOwner in writing at least three days prior to the outage.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Prior to beginning work, survey existing electrical systems. Document, in writing, signed bythe Owner any portions of existing systems that are not operating properly beforeconstruction begins. Any electrical systems found inoperable at the end of the constructionprocess that has not been so documented shall be repaired at the end of construction.

B. Remove electrical equipment in areas being demolished, and electrical equipment feedingother equipment being demolished. Remove raceways and circuitry back to the panel oforigination. Where raceways are installed in inaccessible areas, remove conductors back tothe panel of origination. Where circuits are not being completely demolished, removeconductors back to a junction box or other connection point outside of the renovated area andrecircuit existing electrical equipment that is to remain as required. Where necessary,completely refeed existing electrical equipment that is to remain. It is the intent of thisspecification that all existing equipment to remain be left completely operable at the end ofthe construction process.

C. Survey existing panelboard circuitry and provide new typewritten directories giving completeas-built circuitry information for all panelboards affected by the construction on this project.

D. Where new circuit breakers are installed in existing equipment, the new circuit breakers shallbe manufactured for installation in that equipment. The Amperes Interrupting Current (AIC)Rating shall equal the AIC rating of the existing equipment. A breaker with a lower AICrating may be used if the contractor provides calculations showing that the breaker rating issufficient to handle the available fault current. Submit these calculations for approval prior toordering the breaker. An AIC rating on an existing breaker in the panelboard or switchboarddoes not demonstrate sufficient proof that the available fault current is less than that breaker’sAIC rating.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Products shall be selected to maintain or improve the aesthetics of the facility. Gain approval of theArchitect or Engineer prior to ordering or installing any electrical equipment or raceway.




3.1 Coordinate the routing of all circuits and the locations of all devices with the Architect or Engineerand the Owner. Shop drawings shall describe completely the locations and elevations of allraceways, boxes, fittings, and equipment.

3.2 Where conduits and circuitry are shown concealed in existing walls, ceiling, or floors, employprofessional tradesmen to perform cutting, patching, painting, and any other type of finishingrequired to match the surrounding surfaces. Submit the selected professional’s qualifications to theArchitect or Engineer for approval prior to beginning work.



RACEWAYS 261100 - 1

SECTION 261100 - RACEWAYS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

All electrical systems circuitry shall be contained in raceways unless expressly listed in thespecification for that system.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all raceways, fittings, couplings, anchors, supports, hangers, etc. for completeraceway systems.

B. Except for fire alarm conduit and factory-installed whips on light fixtures, a minimum of 3/4"conduit shall be used for all electrical raceways.

C. Use Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit for circuits allowed to be run undergroundand in slabs on grade level. Provide PVC-coated galvanized rigid steel elbows and PVC-coated galvanized rigid steel conduit for all vertical runs extending to a point at least 6”above grade. Galvanized Rigid steel conduit coated with two complete coats of asphaltum orbituminous paint may be used in lieu of PVC-coated galvanized rigid steel conduit.

D. Use Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) conduit for all applications where circuits are run aboveground and exposed to the weather.

E. Use Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) for all branch circuits, feeders, and auxiliary circuitsrequiring conduit 1 ¼” nominal trade size or larger that are run in dry locations. All 480Vcircuits shall be run in IMC conduit.

F. Use Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) for all 208V & 120V branch circuits and feeders lessthan 1 ¼” nominal trade size that are run in dry locations and in slabs above grade level.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed and approved for usewith 90 degree Celsius conductors. The UL label shall be affixed to each ten foot length of conduitand each fitting. Conduits shall comply with NEMA Specification TC-2 and UL 651. Fittings shallcomply with NEMA TC-3 and UL 514b.

2.2 PVC-coated conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed with PVC asthe primary corrosion protection. They shall be hot dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit withthreads electro-galvanized after cutting. The conduit shall meet UL 6. The fittings shall meet UL514B. The PVC coating shall be uniformly applied to the interior and exterior of all conduit andfittings. The coating shall be nominally 2 mils thick. The PVC coating shall extend one pipediameter or two inches, whichever is less, at every male fitting except unions to fit over the joiningfemale connection. Couplings shall contain a series of longitudinal ribs, 40 mils in thickness, toprotect the coating from damage by tools during installation. PVC-coated conduits shall be ETLVerified PVC-001. Fittings shall be manufactured to the same standard. PVC-coated conduit shallbe Robroy Plastibond or approved equal.


RACEWAYS 261100 - 2

2.3 GRS conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed. They shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel. They shall meet the safety standards of UL 6, and shall be manufacturedto ANSI C80.1. Threads shall be hot galvanized after cutting.

2.4 IMC conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed. They shall be hot-galvanized steel. Fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be the same as those for GRSconduit described above. IMC shall meet UL 1242 and ANSI C80.6. Threads shall be hotgalvanized after cutting. The inside of the conduit shall be finished with a corrosion-resistantcoating.

2.5 EMT conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed. They shall be hotgalvanized steel and shall be produced in accordance with UL 797 and ANSI C80.3. The insideshall be finished with a corrosion-resistant lubricating coating.

2.6 Conduit fittings used with EMT conduits may be set screw indenter type or compression type. Allmetallic fittings for IMC and Rigid conduit shall be compression type fittings.

2.7 Flexible metallic conduit shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be UL listed ascompliant with UL 1 and UL 1479.

2.8 Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be coated with a PVCjacket to resist liquids, dirt, grease, and oils. All fittings shall be designed, constructed, andinstalled to maintain the integrity of the liquidtight connections. Liquidtight flexible conduit shallcomply with UL 360.


3.1 Conduits run underground shall be buried no less than 24” deep. Services, conduits for primaryconductors, and conduits run under roadways shall be buried no less than 48” deep.

3.2 Do not install conduits in or below ground floor slabs, except for service conduits, site lighting, andwhere specifically indicated on the drawings.

3.3 Do not install conduits within 6” of the deck where a screw down type roof system is utilized.

3.4 PVC-coated conduits may be field-bent provided that manufacturer-approved tools are used.Individuals installing PVC-coated conduits shall be trained for installation by factory-certifiedtrainers. Provide evidence of training with equipment brochures.

3.5 Support and install all conduits per the latest edition of the National Electrical Code. Supportgroups of conduits with electrical strut supported by threaded rods anchored to the buildingstructure. Supports shall be designed to hold no less than twice the weight of the conduit andconductors to be supported plus an additional 250 pounds at midspan.

3.6 All conduits shall be grouped and run parallel to each other and to building walls.

3.7 All conduits shall be assembled according to the Manufacturer’s instructions.

3.8 Conduits run underground shall be assembled to be watertight.


RACEWAYS 261100 - 3

3.9 Cap all conduits during installation. Pull a mandrel sized for that conduit and a cleaning brushthrough each conduit before installation of any conductors.

3.10 Conduits that are obviously damaged and field bends that are obviously out of round shall bereplaced.

3.11 Provide final connections to equipment with flexible metallic conduit. In wet or damp locations,use liquidtight flexible metallic conduit.

3.12 Terminate all 1” and smaller conduits entering boxes with a locknut inside the box and a locknutoutside the box. Provide protective bushings on all 1” and smaller conduit threads. Use watertighthubs where conduit terminations are exposed to moisture.

3.13 Use grounding bushings on all connections of 1-1/4” and larger conduits into outlet boxes, junctionboxes, metallic enclosures, and panelboards. Grounding bushings shall also be used on allunderground conduits and elsewhere required by the National Electrical Code.

3.14 Conduits shall be run no closer than 12” to hot water pipes.

3.15 Where conduits are run through the ceiling and are required to make connections to equipmentwithin the room that is not located near a wall, support the conduit from the structural ceiling andprovide a flange bolted to the floor. Install a tee conduit fitting in the vertical run of conduit, andmake the connection to the equipment with a piece of flexible conduit extending from the teeconduit fitting to the equipment.

3.16 Provide expansion fittings where conduits cross building expansion joints. Provide groundingjumpers between the conduits.

3.17 Provide EMT conduit sleeves where conduits pass through walls, floors, or footings sized aminimum of two nominal trade sizes larger than the conduit that must pass through the sleeve.

3.1 Equip all empty conduits with a pullwire or string capable of withstanding 500 pounds of pullingtension.



SURFACE-MOUNTED RACEWAYS, BOXES AND OUTLETS 261200 - 1

SECTION 261200 - SURFACE-MOUNTED RACEWAYS, BOXES AND OUTLETS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

Install circuitry in surface-mounted raceway, boxes, and outlets only where specifically shown on thedrawings, and where specific written permission is granted by the Engineer for a certain location.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all raceways, fittings, straps, bushings, couplings, anchors, supports, hangers, boxes,outlets, cover plates, etc. for complete raceway systems. All components of the system shall bemanufactured by the same company.

B. Furnish devices as specified in Section 264600 and other applicable sections.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Raceway components shall be of the dual channel, nonmetallic, tamper-resistant construction with awhite scratch-resistant finish. The finish shall be paintable with latex paint.

2.2 The raceway shall be 2” x 4”. Larger raceway may be used where it is necessary to groupconductors to minimize the number of raceway runs. Identify any locations where larger racewayis proposed to be used on contract shop drawings. The NEC allowable fill for this type of racewayshall not be exceeded.

2.3 The surface-mounted raceway system components shall be of the Wiremold 40N2 Series orapproved equal.


3.1 Coordinate routing of the surface-mounted raceway system with the Owner and Engineer during thecreation of shop drawings. Run raceways in corners where possible.

3.2 All raceway components shall be assembled and all circuitry installed per the Manufacturer’srecommendations.

3.3 Ground the raceway system per the NEC and Section 262500.



CABLE TRAY 261300 - 1

SECTION 261300 – WIREMESH CABLE TRAY

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Provide all clamps, brackets, splice plates, expansion joint assemblies, fittings, hardware,structural supports, grounding clamps, etc. for a complete system of cable tray.

1.2 The cable tray system shall be UL listed.

1.3 This specification describes a wire mesh cable management system to provide an economicalsystem for the project; however, ladder type steel or aluminum cable tray of the same size andmeeting the same loading requirements will be accepted provided that the tray proposed is ofequal or superior quality. The wire mesh cable tray shall be Legrand CF54 300 Cablofil orapproved equal.

1.4 Submit six sets of manufacturer’s cut sheets and shop drawings for approval prior to orderingcable tray. Coordinate the creation of shop drawings with all building trades. The contractdrawings are provided to show the general routing of the cable tray. Support cable tray from thejoists or walls as required to avoid conflicts with the equipment of other trades. Shop drawingssubmitted shall bear the stamps and signatures of the General Contractor, the PlumbingContractor, the Fire Protection Contractor, the HVAC Contractor, the Structural Contractor, andthe Acoustical Ceiling Contractor to indicate that the various systems have been coordinated. It isthe Contractor’s responsibility to resolve conflicts between trades prior to the beginning ofconstruction. Notify the Architect prior to the beginning of construction of any problem areasthat may exist. Submit drawings detailing the cross section of such areas.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 The wiremesh cable tray shall be constructed of Carbon Steel welded wire with nominal 2” x 4”mesh. The wire shall be electroplated zinc galvanized from 0.7 to 0.8 mils thick.

2.2 The Contractor shall make all bends, tees, intersections, crosses, and other connections in the fieldin accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations. Bolt cutters with an offset cutting bladejaw shall be used to ensure entraining of a protective coat over cuts and creation of a galvaniccouple to protect them. Cutter jaws shall be positioned as close as possible to wire intersections tofacilitate assembly and production of ends, tees, crosses, and other configurations.

2.3 Cable tray depth shall be a nominal 2.2” and shall be a nominal 12” in width.

2.4 The cable tray shall support a load of 13 pounds per linear foot with a maximum deflection of 0.4inches when supported at 8’ increments.

2.5 Provide a continuous #6 ground wire bonded to each cable tray section and to the building powersystem ground.


3.1 Install cable tray in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions and the National ElectricalCode.


CABLE TRAY 261300 - 2

3.2 Transition to conduit when passing through fire rated walls or over non-accessible ceilings.Conduits sized to equal the cable tray capacity shall be installed, even if the full capacity is notpresently utilized.



OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES 261500 - 1

SECTION 261500 - OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install all outlet boxes and junction boxes in accordance with this specification and therequirements of the NEC.

1.2 Provide outlet boxes for all switches, receptacles, luminaires, telephone jacks, cable jacks, andother devices furnished in this Contract. Provide all necessary hardware including, but not limitedto, additional structural support, support brackets, screws, bolts, fixture studs, etc.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Outlet boxes and junction boxes shall be manufactured by Raco, Steel City, Crouse Hinds, or Appleton.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Concealed Outlet boxes and junction boxes in dry locations shall be galvanized stamped steelboxes sized per the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC), but no less than 4” x4” x 2 1/8” deep (Raco #231 or equal). The thickness of the steel shall be in compliance withthe requirements of the NEC. Provide stamped steel covers for all junction boxes manufacturedto fit the particular box on which it is used.

A. Exposed Outlet boxes in dry locations shall be heavy duty, deep, die cast aluminum deviceboxes (Perfect Line “T” or “LT” series or approved equal) with appropriate coverplates.

B. Outlet boxes used in concrete and masonry walls and ceilings shall be of the concrete typemanufactured for such applications.

C. Outlet boxes and junction boxes in wet locations shall be of cast metal construction withgasketed waterproof covers. All conduit connections to the boxes shall be made watertight.

D. Wall outlet boxes shall be 4” x 4” x 2 1/8” (Raco #231 or equal), or larger as required, withplaster rings provided for final flush installation. Plaster rings shall have single-gang openingsunless the equipment mounted inside requires two-gang installation.

E. Floor boxes in slabs on grade shall be deep rectangular, cast iron, fully adjustable boxes withbrass rings. Covers shall be made of brass and shall provide flip top access to the power or datajacks inside. Screw-on covers are not acceptable unless a flip-top cover is unavailable for thedevice installed in the floor box. Provide the box sized as required for the number of devicesshown installed. Boxes shall be as follows, or approved equal:

1. Single-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B24362. Single-Gang Cover Plates: Hubbell S38253. Double-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B42334. Double-Gang Cover Plates: Two Hubbell S3825 Cover Plates5. Triple-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B43336. Triple-Gang Cover Plates: Three Hubbell S3825 Cover Plates


OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES 261500 - 2

In slabs above grade, use cast iron, semi-adjustable shallow boxes as follows, or approvedequal:

1. Single-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B24142. Two-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B42143. Three-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B4314

Receptacles installed in floor boxes shall be as described in Specification 264600, Switches andReceptacles. Data, Telephone, or Combination Data and Telephone Outlets shall consist ofCategory 5 rated RJ45 jacks mounted in a Hubbell DJOI strap for use under a S3825 flip topcover plate.

In existing slabs above grade, use poke thru boxes as follows, or equal:

1. Hubbell System One

F. Size all boxes per the requirements of the latest NEC.


3.1 All devices shall be flush mounted unless specific written permission is obtained from the Engineerfor a particular device in a particular location.

3.2 Install outlet boxes in walls, and provide plaster rings such that wall finish contractor’s finish is flushagainst the edge of the plaster ring. Workmanship will not be accepted where the hole in the wallshows behind the cover plate, or the wall finish is uneven or unpainted at the edge of the cover plate.

3.3 Use round or square ceiling outlet boxes as required for the device being installed. The ceilingshall be finished flush against the box; the fixture shall completely cover the box and mount tightagainst the ceiling. Coordinate the requirements of the fixture prior to installing the box.

3.4 Provide junction boxes, pull boxes, and conduit fittings where required by the NEC to limit thenumber of bends in the raceway, and where required to prevent damage to conductors due to longruns.

3.5 Junction boxes and pull boxes installed in the ground outside shall be Quazite Composolite orapproved equal. Mount the boxes over 24” of washed gravel fill. If splices are to be made insidethe boxes, the boxes shall be of the type furnished with a bottom, and all conduit connections shallbe watertight. In addition, all conductor splices shall be made watertight using an appropriatesplice kit as manufactured by 3M, or an approved equal.



GROUNDING 262500 - 1

SECTION 262500 - GROUNDING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Ground all equipment, systems, structures, etc., per the latest edition of the National Electrical Code(NEC). The overall, installed grounding electrode system shall have a resistance to earth of 5 ohmsor less.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Use mechanical bolted connections in dry locations that are accessible.

2.2 Use exothermic welds in wet locations and locations that will be inaccessible at the end ofconstruction.

2.3 Ground rods shall be UL listed 3/4” x 10’ copper-clad steel ground rods with a minimum coppercladding thickness of 10 mils.

2.4 All above grade grounding conductors shall have Type THW insulation, or equivalent, with greeninsulation.

2.5 All below grade grounding electrode conductors shall be bare or shall be colored green for its entireexposed length.

2.6 All loadcenters, panelboards, switchboards, transformers, enclosed circuit breakers, disconnects,control cabinets, etc. shall be provided with factory installed ground bars suitable for the size andquantity of grounding conductors terminating or originating from the device.

PART 3 – EMBEDDED GROUNDING

3.1 All ground wire shall be soft or medium drawn Class B stranded copper with cable size andinsulation as shown on the drawings.

3.2 The minimum size conductor to be used on main grounding circuits shall be #2/0 AWG. Theminimum size conductor to be used on any part of the embedded grounding system

3.3 All underground connections shall be made using an exothermic welding process.

3.4 At the point of attachment of all grounding connections, the surface shall be cleaned of all paint,oil, and grease and shall be dressed to bright metal to insure electrical continuity.

3.5 The minimum allowable depth of ground cable below permanent grade is 30 inches unless notedotherwise.

3.6 Where underground conductors are brought above grade, each conductor shall be enclosed in Sch.40 PVC conduit and appropriately secured.

3.7 All completed grounding connections shall be cleaned and coated with insulating paint.


GROUNDING 262500 - 2

3.8 All new ground grids shall be connected to any existing nearby ground grids and to the groundconductors in any duct banks that terminate within the ground grid.


4.1 Ground rods shall be installed with their tops no less than 12” below grade. Provide supplementalground rods (in addition to the number of ground rods shown on the grounding detail), as required,to bring the overall resistance to earth to 5 ohms or less. Supplemental ground rods shall beinstalled a minimum of 8' apart.

4.2 Bond ground connections to metal raceways at each end of the conduit run. Provide groundingbushings where required by the NEC. Where ladder cable trays are used, bond the ground conductorto each section & fitting of the tray and to the building power system ground. Where wiremesh cabletrays are used, provide a continuous #6 ground wire bonded to each cable tray section and to thebuilding power system ground.

4.3 Foundation reinforcing bars shall be bonded to the ground grid using a connector UL listed for theapplication.

4.4 Bond the secondary neutral to ground on all step down transformers and all separately derivedsystems per NEC article 250.

4.5 Provide all circuits with an equipment grounding conductor sized per the NEC, or as shown on thedrawings. Circuitry shown on drawings does not include the required equipment groundingconductor. The equipment grounding conductor shall be furnished with green insulation forconductors #8 AWG and smaller; where larger than #8, the equipment grounding conductor shallbe taped green for its entire exposed length.

4.6 Individual ground conductors shall be installed in PVC conduit sized per the NEC.

4.7 Provide receptacles, luminaires, and other devices with a green conductor that bonds the receptaclegrounding screw or pigtail, the outlet box grounding screw, and the equipment grounding conductortogether.

4.8 All boxes, enclosures, and electrical equipment shall be bonded to ground with a ground conductorsized per NEC.

4.9 In health care facilities, where two or more different panelboards serve the same patient-care area, a#6 AWG insulated continuous copper conductor shall bond these different panelboards together.

4.10 Telephone, cable television, and other auxiliary systems shall be bonded to the electrical buildingservice ground using a conductor no smaller than #1/0 AWG. See the exact groundingrequirements in each system’s specification.

4.11 All SPD’s shall be bonded to ground per the Manufacturer’s installation instructions and/or thelatest edition of the National Electrical Code.



600V CONDUCTORS 264100 - 1

SECTION 264100 - 600V CONDUCTORS

PART 1 – GENERAL

Provide all circuitry, terminations, splices, connectors, lugs, and other equipment necessary forconnection of all equipment requiring electrical connections.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 All electrical conductors shall be soft-drawn annealed copper having 98% conductivity and aninsulation rating of 600V.

2.2 Conductors shall be UL listed for installation in the raceway in which they are to be installed.

2.3 Conductors shall be rated 90 degrees C for use in residential, commercial, industrial, andinstitutional facilities, and shall be listed as 105 degrees C appliance wire. Conductors shall belisted under UL 83, UL 1063, and UL 758. If XLP or EPR insulation is used, conductors shall belisted under UL 44 and NEMA WC7.

2.4 Conductors used for branch circuits, feeders, auxiliary systems, and controls run in dry locationsshall have PVC insulation and a Nylon outer jacket. They shall be THHN/THWN or XHHW-2.

2.5 Conductors used for branch circuits, feeders, auxiliary systems, and controls run in wet locations(i.e. circuits run underground, etc.) shall have XLP or EPR insulation and be type XHHW-2.

2.6 Conductors used for operating room isolation panels and associated branch circuits shall be copper,stranded conductor having a cross-linked polyethylene insulation or equivalent with a dielectricconstant of 3.5 or less. Wire-pulling compounds that increase the dielectric constant shall not beused on the secondary conductors of isolation panels. The isolated circuit conductors shall beidentified as follows:

Isolated Circuit #1 – OrangeIsolated Circuit #2 – Brown

For 125 volt, 15 & 20 ampere receptacles: The orange conductor shall be connected to the terminalon the receptacle that is identified in accordance with NEC 200.10(B) for connection to thegrounded circuit conductor.

2.7 Conductors used for services shall be type SE for aerial services or type USE-2 for undergroundservices.

2.8 All conductors shall be stranded, unless noted otherwise. Use ring tongue terminals or spade lugsfor connections to terminal screws.

2.9 Use minimum #14 AWG conductors for controls and auxiliary circuits. Use larger conductors asrequired to compensate for voltage drops exceeding 3% of the system voltage.

2.10 Conductors shall be furnished in the colors described below unless local ordinances requiredifferent colors. Conductors #8 and smaller shall be furnished with colored insulation; conductorslarger than #8 shall be taped with the appropriately colored tape for a length of at least 2” at each


600V CONDUCTORS 264100 - 2

panelboard, junction box, pull box, load, or other exposed location. Ground conductors shall betaped green for their entire exposed length.

SystemVoltage 208Y/120V, 3-Phase,4-Wire

120/240V, 3-Phase,4-Wire

480Y/277V, 3-Phase,4-Wire

Phase A Black Black BrownPhase B Red Orange OrangePhase C Blue Blue YellowNeutral White White GrayGround Green Green Green


3.1 Install conductors carefully using a minimum of two tradesmen – one feeding the conductors intothe conduit, and the other pulling the conductors into the conduit.

3.2 Splices shall only be used for making taps in conductor runs – not for pull through conductors.Conductors shall be continuous from source to load unless specifically permitted in writing by theengineer for a particular application.

3.3 Splices shall only be made in approved enclosures. Splices shall not be pulled inside conduits.

3.4 Each branch circuit and multiwire branch circuit shall be run with its own neutral conductor.

3.5 Join stranded conductors with appropriate mechanical or compression lugs. Wire nuts may be usedfor solid conductors only. Control conductors shall be terminated or spliced on appropriatelylabeled terminal blocks.

3.6 Provide cable supports and strain relief connectors as required by the NEC.

3.7 Furnish junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes, manholes, etc. as required to ensure that themaximum number of bends allowed by the NEC are not exceeded and to ensure that the cables arenot damaged during installation.



PANELBOARDS 264200 - 1

SECTION 264200 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install all panelboards, complete with their circuit breakers, phase buses, neutralbuses, ground buses, structural supports, and other equipment necessary for complete systems.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Panelboards shall be designed, manufactured, and tested to be in compliance with NEMA PB1, UL 50, UL 67, UL 489, NFPA 70, and the ASTM.

B. Circuit breakers shall be designed, manufactured, and tested to be in compliance with NEMAAB 1, UL 489, and Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN.

C. Panelboards shall be UL listed for service entrance where used for that purpose.

D. Panelboard ampere interrupting current (AIC) ratings shall equal the lowest rated device inthe panelboard. Provide panelboards with the AIC ratings shown on the Contract Drawings.Buses shall be braced to withstand the AIC rating shown on the drawings. Series ratings shallonly be used where shown on the panelboard schedules.

E. All panelboards shall be furnished with dead-front, door-in-door construction.

F. All loadcenters and panelboards shall be provided with factory installed ground bars suitablefor the size and quantity of grounding conductors terminating and/or originating from thepanel.

G. Lug locations shall be determined during the creation of shop drawings for properarrangement with the raceway system.

H. Buses shall be constructed of 98% conductivity copper or equivalently rated aluminum.

I. Panelboard enclosures shall be NEMA 1 when they are to be mounted indoors, and NEMA3R when they are to be mounted outdoors. Provide special enclosures where shown on theContract Drawings.


Panelboards shall be manufactured by Siemens, Square D, General Electric, or Eaton.

2.3 PANELBOARD CLASSES

A. Power distribution panelboards shall be available with mains and branch devices up to 1200amperes. AIC ratings shall be available up to 200,000 Amperes. Power distributionpanelboards shall be equipped with a nameplate containing the appropriate system voltage,number of wires, and number of phases for the system on which they are installed.



B. In 480Vac and less applications where a main breaker not exceeding 600 Amperes isrequired, the AIC rating does not exceed 65,000 Amperes, and no branch breakers exceed125Amperes, Square D NF and equivalent panelboards may be used.

C. In 480Vac and less applications where a main breaker not exceeding 225 Amperes isrequired, the AIC rating does not exceed 14,000 Amperes, and no branch breakers exceed100Amperes, Square D NEHB and equivalent panelboards may be used.

D. In 240Vac and less applications where a main breaker not exceeding 400 Amperes or mainlugs not exceeding 600 Amperes is required, the AIC rating does not exceed 22,000 Amperes,and no branch breakers exceed 125 Amperes, Square D NQOD and equivalent panelboardsmay be used.

2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. All circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, molded-case type breakers with quick-make,quick-break contact action, unless noted to be furnished with electronic trip units.

B. Thermal Magnetic type circuit breakers shall have thermal and magnetic tripping elements oneach pole. Breakers with multiple poles shall have common tripping of all poles. Circuitbreaker ampere ratings shall be stamped on the handle. Interrupting ratings of the circuitbreakers shall be equivalent to the specified AIC rating of the panelboard. Breakers handlesshall reside in a position between “ON” and “OFF” after a trip condition. Breakers shall berated HACR when used for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration; HID when used withHigh Intensity Discharge fixtures; and shall be rated SWD when used for switching duty.

C. Electronic Trip Units shall have the following features: long time pickup, long time delay,short time pickup, short time delay, and instantaneous settings.

D. Circuit breaker sizes for motor loads are based on Square D recommendations for use of theirbreakers at the motor horsepowers listed on the mechanical drawings. If equipment is usedother than Square D, adjust breaker sizes per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Circuit breakers with slash ratings, such as 120/240V or 480Y/277V, shall be used in solidlygrounded systems where the nominal voltage of any conductor to ground does not exceed thelower of the two values of the breaker’s voltage rating and the nominal voltage between anytwo conductors does not exceed the higher value of the circuit breaker’s voltage rating.

F. Circuit breakers with straight voltage ratings, such as 240V or 480V, shall be used in systemsother than solidly grounded systems (Corner-Grounded Delta, Ungrounded, ImpedanceGrounded, etc.) where the nominal voltage between any two conductors does not exceed thecircuit breaker’s voltage rating. A two-pole circuit breaker shall not be used to protect athree-phase, Corner-Grounded Delta system unless the circuit breaker is marked 1Ф-3Ф.


3.1 Install panelboards in complete compliance with all Manufacturers’ installation instructions.

3.2 Install conductors neatly in panelboards. Group and tie-wrap circuits that share a common neutral.

3.3 All panelboards shall have typewritten circuit directories.



3.4 Number circuits exactly as shown on the contract drawings.

3.5 Panelboards shall be labeled with a three line black phenolic nameplate with white core with 1/4"high letters. Nameplate shall identify panel and voltage, i.e., "Panel LA", "480Y/277V, 3ф, 4W","Fed from MDP".

3.6 Install Available Fault Current Labels on each Panelboard.

3.7 Any panels that are floor mounted shall be provided with a 4” thick concrete housekeeping pad thatextends 3-1/2” around all edges of the panel. Provide 1”, 45 degree chamfered edges.

3.8 Where panelboards are flush-mounted, provide one ¾” spare conduit to above the accessible ceilingfor every three available circuits not being used, but no less than two ¾” spare conduits perpanelboard.



DISCONNECTS & SEPARATELY-MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 264300 - 1

SECTION 264300 - DISCONNECTS & SEPARATELY-MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install all disconnects and separately mounted circuit breakers as shown on thedrawings, specified herein, and required by the NEC.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Disconnects shall be of the heavy-duty type, and shall be UL listed for service entrance use.They shall meet or exceed the requirements of NEMA Standard KS1. Provide fuses sized toappropriately protect the load served. Equipment manufacturer’s recommendations shall takeprecedence over the Contract Drawings.

B. Fuses shall be dual element, time-delay, Class J fuses. They shall be Bussman Low-Peak orapproved equal.

C. All disconnects and enclosed circuit breakers shall be provided with factory installed groundbars suitable for the size and quantity of grounding conductors terminating and/or originatingfrom the device.

D. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, molded-case with quick-make, quick-breakcontact action, unless noted otherwise. They shall have thermal and magnetic trippingelements on each pole. Breakers with multiple poles shall have common tripping of all poles.Circuit breaker ampere ratings shall be stamped on the handle. Interrupting ratings of thecircuit breakers shall be equivalent to the specified AIC rating of the panelboard. Breakershandles shall reside in a position between “ON” and “OFF” after a trip condition. Breakersshall be rated HACR when used for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration; HID whenused with High Intensity Discharge fixtures; and shall be rated SWD when used for switchingduty.

E. Circuit breaker sizes for motor loads are based on Square D recommendations for use of theirbreakers at the motor horsepowers listed on the mechanical drawings. If equipment is usedother than Square D, adjust breaker sizes per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. Circuit breakers with slash ratings, such as 120/240V or 480Y/277V, shall be used in solidlygrounded systems where the nominal voltage of any conductor to ground does not exceed thelower of the two values of the breaker’s voltage rating and the nominal voltage between anytwo conductors does not exceed the higher value of the circuit breaker’s voltage rating.

G. Circuit breakers with straight voltage ratings, such as 240V or 480V, shall be used in systemsother than solidly grounded systems (Corner-Grounded Delta, Ungrounded, ImpedanceGrounded, etc.) where the nominal voltage between any two conductors does not exceed thecircuit breaker’s voltage rating. A two-pole circuit breaker shall not be used to protect athree-phase, Corner-Grounded Delta system unless the circuit breaker is marked 1Ф-3Ф.

H. Disconnect and individually-mounted circuit breaker ampere interrupting current (AIC)ratings shall equal the rating of the panelboard from which they are fed unless otherwisenoted.


DISCONNECTS & SEPARATELY-MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 264300 - 2

I. Buses shall be constructed of 98% conductivity copper or equivalently rated aluminum.

J. Switches shall be horsepower rated where used to serve motors.

K. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 when they are to be mounted indoors, NEMA 3R when they areto be mounted outdoors, and NEMA 4X where they are subject to washdown. Providespecial enclosures where shown on the Contract Drawings.


Disconnects and separately-mounted circuit breakers shall be manufactured by Siemens, Square D,General Electric, or Cutler Hammer.


3.1 Install disconnects and individually-mounted circuit breakers in complete compliance with allmanufacturers’ installation instructions. Where necessary, provide structural supports and bracingfor installation.

3.2 Disconnects are to be surface-mounted.

3.3 Install Available Fault Current Labels on each Disconnect and Separately-Mounted Circuit Breaker.

3.4 Individually-mounted circuit breakers are to be flush-mounted unless otherwise shown.



TRANSFORMERS 264400 - 1

SECTION 264400 - TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

Provide all equipment, labor, and materials required for complete and operable installation oftransformers as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Transformers 1000 KVA and smaller shall be listed by UL. They shall conform to the requirementsof ANSI/NFPA 70. They are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA ST20.

2.2 Transformers shall be designed for operation at 60 Hz. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings,each transformer shall be a three-phase unit with a 480 volt, delta connected primary, and a208Y/120 volt secondary.

2.3 Transformer shall be of the energy-efficient type.

2.4 Where transformers are shown on the drawings to be K-rated, they shall be UL listed and labeledfor the K-rating indicated based on the sum of fundamental and harmonics per UL 1561. Theyshall be listed for 115 degrees C average temperature rise. K-rated transformers shall have animpedance of 3% to 5% with a minimum reactance of 2% in order to help reduce neutral currentwhen supplying loads with large amounts of third harmonic current.

2.5 All transformers shall be provided with factory installed ground bars suitable for the size andquantity of grounding conductors terminating or originating from the transformer. A neutral toground bond shall be field installed between the neutral (Xo) bushing and the ground bar on eachtransformer.

2.6 All insulating materials shall exceed NEMA ST20 standards and be rated for 220 degrees Celsiusaccording to UL’s component recognized insulation system.

2.7 Transformers 15 KVA and larger shall be rated for 150 degrees C temperature rise above anambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Transformers 25 KVA and above shall have four 2.5% fullcapacity primary taps (two above and two below).

2.8 The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50 degrees C above anambient temperature of 40 degrees C.

2.9 Furnish transformers located outside with factory-furnished weatherproof enclosures.

2.10 Transformer coils shall be of continuous wound construction.

2.11 Transformer cores are to be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible groundingconductor sized in accordance with applicable UL and NEC standards.

2.12 Transformers shall be ventilated and fabricated of heavy gauge sheet steel. The entire enclosureshall be finished utilizing a continuous process of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followedby electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder coating and baking to provide a uniformcoating of all edges and surfaces.


TRANSFORMERS 264400 - 2

2.13 Sound levels shall be warranted by the manufacturer not to exceed the following:

15 to 50 KVA – 45 dB 51 to 150 KVA – 50 dB 151 to 300 KVA – 55 dB 301 to 500 KVA – 60 dB 501 to 700 KVA – 62 dB 701 to 1000 KVA – 64 dB 1001 to 1500 KVA – 65 dB 1501 to 2000 KVA – 66 dB


3.1 Install transformers in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the latest versionof the National Electrical Code.

3.2 Provide a minimum of 6” of ventilation space around all sides of transformers.

3.3 Provide concrete housekeeping pads for transformers mounted indoors. Housekeeping pads shallconsist of 3.5” thick pads containing #4 reinforcing bars on 6” centers in both horizontal directionsin the center of 3000 psi concrete. Where transformers are located outside, the pad shall extend atleast 6” above grade and shall have a 12” wide footing at least 4” below the frost line; the footingshall be a minimum of 12” deep.

3.4 Transformers not exceeding 75 KVA may be wall-mounted where sufficient proof is provided thatthe structure can support the weight and where factory-provided wall brackets are used.



SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 264600 - 1

SECTION 264600 - SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES

PART 1 – GENERAL

Furnish and install all switches and receptacles in accordance with this specification and the requirementsof the NEC.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS


Switches and receptacles shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Cooper Wiring Devices, Leviton, or Pass &Seymour.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Switches and receptacles shall be specification grade. They shall have ampacity and voltageratings suitable for the application in which they are used.

B. Provide brushed stainless steel cover plates for the lab tombstone outlets. All otherdevices and cover plates shall be grey to match the other FQ facilities. A single coverplate shall cover all devices in one box.

C. Light switches shall be 20 Ampere, 120-277V back-wired and side-wired toggle switches.They shall be rated up to 2 HP at 240V. Each switch shall be equipped with a groundingscrew. Switches shall be Hubbell CSB series or approved equal.

D. Duplex NEMA 5-20R receptacles shall be Hubbell HBL 5362A or approved equal.

E. Duplex GFI NEMA 5-20R receptacles shall be Hubbell HBL GF5362A or approved equal.

F. Weatherproof while-in-use cover plates shall be Teddico #34017-7 or approved equal. Coverplates shall be single gang, lockable, and constructed of heavy duty die cast metal.

G. All 125V, 15 and 20 ampere receptacles installed in dwelling units shall be of the tamper-resistant type.

H. All 125V, 20 ampere receptacles installed in the Cafeteria/Kitchen areas shall be GFCIprotected per the latest version of the NEC.

I. All 15 and 20 ampere, 125 and 250V non-locking receptacles installed in wet or damplocations shall be listed as the weather-resistant type.

J. Devices furnished in this Contract, but not listed above, shall be of the same standard ofquality as those items listed.



SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 264600 - 2

3.1 Flush mount all devices unless specific written permission is obtained from the Engineer for aparticular device in a particular location.

3.2 Install all devices vertically unless the drawings specifically state that the particular device shouldbe mounted horizontally.

3.3 Install receptacles by utilizing pigtails. Do not install receptacles in a “feed thru” fashion.

3.4 Install receptacles with the ground slot up.



ELECTRICAL TESTING 264800 - 1

SECTION 264800 - ELECTRICAL TESTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 This specification describes the requirements for inspection and testing of electrical equipment.The Contractor shall provide inspection, testing, calibration and adjustment of electricalequipment or engage the services of a qualified third party testing organization. If a third partytesting organization is employed for these tasks, they shall be a first tier subcontractor.

1.2 Notify the Engineer at least one week in advance of all tests. The Engineer and/or Owner shallhave the right to witness all tests. The Contractor shall submit three copies of all inspection andtest reports. All reports shall include certification of compliance with specified requirements,identify deficiencies, and recommend corrective action when appropriate. Test reports shall beneatly typed and bound and shall be submitted not more than six days after tests are completed.

PART 2 – PERFORMANCE

2.1 The Contractor or testing organization shall perform acceptance tests and inspections. Testmethods, procedures, and test values shall be performed and evaluated in accordance with theManufacturer’s recommendations and with the International Electrical Testing Association, Inc.Publication ATS-2007, “Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power DistributionEquipment and Systems” (NETA ATS 2007).

2.2 The Contractor shall supply to the testing organization shop drawings of the equipment and acopy of the approved protective device coordination study showing the required settings.

2.3 Optional tests in NETA ATS 2007 are not required unless otherwise specified.

2.4 Electrical equipment shall not be placed into service until after the completion of all required testsand evaluations of the test results have been completed.

PART 3 – EQUIPMENT TO BE TESTED

3.1 480 Volt Switchgear/Switchboards/Enclosed Circuit Breakers

3.1.1 Perform tests in accordance with applicable sections of NETA ATS 2007 Section 7.1.

3.1.2 Perform tests on all low voltage drawout power circuit breakers in accordance withapplicable sections of NETA ATS 2007 Section 7.6.1.2.

3.1.3 Primary injection testing shall be used for all circuit breakers.

3.1.4 The Contractor shall provide the settings for all circuit breaker trip units from theprotective device coordination study. If a study is not included in this project, thesettings shall be provided by the Electrical Engineer.

3.1.5 For current and voltage transformers that are installed as part of a low voltage powercircuit breaker, perform tests on these items in accordance with applicable sections ofNETA ATS 2007 Section 7.10.

3.2 Motor Control Centers (600V and Below)



3.2.1 Perform tests in accordance with applicable sections of NETA ATS 2007 Section7.16.2.1. Only the tests to certify that the buses can be safely energized are required.

3.2.2 All bolted connections shall be checked for high resistance using a low-resistanceohmmeter in accordance with NETA ATS 2007 Section 7.16.2.1. Bolt-torque levels shallbe in accordance with Manufacturer’s published data.

3.3 Low Voltage (600V and Below) Feeders

3.3.1 All bolted connections shall be checked for high resistance using a low-resistanceohmmeter in accordance with NETA ATS 2007 Section 7.3.2.1. Bolt-torque levels shallbe in accordance with Manufacturer’s published data.

3.3.2 Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacentconductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300-volt rated cable and 1000volts dc for 600-volt rated cable. The test duration shall be one minute. (NETA ATS2007 Section 7.3.2.2).

3.3.3 Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection.

3.3.4 Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

3.4 15kV Shielded Power Cable

3.4.1 Each cable shall be tested for insulation integrity prior to energizing. The tested cableshall include all splices, terminations, and the overall length of the conductor, but shallnot include switchgear, transformers, nor lightning arresters. The test shall include 10 to15 minutes of exposure to high voltage D.C. with leakage current values monitored,recorded, and supplied to the Engineer in graphical form. The cable shall be tested inaccordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.

Test Duration: 15 minutes. If the leakage current quickly stabilizes, the testduration may be reduced to ten minutes.

Test Type: D. C. high voltage

Test voltage for new cable shall be as follows:o 5kV - 115 mils Cables, 25kV Test Voltageo 15kV - 220 mils Cables, 65kV Test Voltage (a 53kV Test Voltage shall be used

when using Loadbreak Elbows)

Test voltage for existing cables less than five years old shall be as followso 5kV Cables, 20kV Test Voltageo 15kV Cables, 40kV Test Voltage

3.4.2 The currents resulting from the D.C. high voltage testing shall be recorded and providedto the Engineer. The test results shall demonstrate that the leakage current decreases orremains constant after reaching the specified test voltage.



3.5 FR3 Fluid Filled Transformers

3.5.1 The production testing procedure is covered in specification 264500.

3.5.2 Perform a turns-ratio and insulation resistance test in accordance with NETA ATS 2007Section 7.2.2 to certify that the transformer can be safely energized.

3.6 Grounding

3.6.1 The overall, installed grounding electrode system shall have a resistance to earth of 5ohms or less.

3.6.2 All bolted connections shall be checked for high resistance using a low-resistanceohmmeter in accordance with NETA ATS 2007 Section 7.13.2.

3.6.3 Perform a three/four point fall-of-potential method, four point Wenner method, oralternative test in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 81 on the installed, main groundingelectrode system. Hand-held Ground Resistance Multimeters and MEGGER insulationtesters are NOT approved testing methods.

3.7 Equipment Ground Fault Protection

3.7.1 When equipment ground fault protection is utilized, it shall be performance tested inaccordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions and NEC Article 230.95(C), 517.17(D),and 708.52(C). A written record shall be made of this test.

3.8 Emergency/Standby Generators and Associated Automatic Transfer Switches

3.8.1 The complete installation shall be tested for compliance with the specifications followingcompletion of all site work and after normal power is available. Testing shall beconducted by the Manufacturer's local distributor, with required fuel supplied by theContractor. The Engineer shall be notified in advance and shall have the option towitness the tests.

Installation acceptance tests to be conducted on-site shall include a "cold start" test, atwo hour full load test, and a one step rated load pickup test in accordance with NFPA110. A resistive load bank and temporary connections shall be provided as required forthe full load test.

NFPA 110 Load Test Regulations:

1. Verify that the equipment is installed properly.2. Check all auxiliary devices for proper operation, including battery charger,

jacket water heater(s), generator space heater, remote annunciator, automatictransfer switches, etc.

3. Test all alarms and safety shutdown devices for proper operation andannunciation.

4. Check all fluid levels.5. Start engine and check for exhaust, oil, fuel leaks, vibrations, etc.6. The system shall be tested under full load and monitor the following

readings:



a) Oil pressureb) Coolant temperaturec) Battery charge rated) AC voltse) AC Amperes- all phasesf) Frequencyg) Kilowattsh) Ambient Temperature

7. Verify proper voltage and phase rotation at the transfer switch beforeconnecting to the load.

8. Perform a power failure test on the entire installed system. This test shall beconducted by opening the power supply from the utility service, andobserving proper operation of the system for at least 2 hours. Coordinatetiming and obtain approval for start of test with site personnel.

3.9 Essential Electrical Systems in Healthcare Facilities

3.9.1 Essential electrical systems shall be tested per the latest editions of NFPA 99 and NFPA110.



SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) 264900 - 1

SECTION 264900 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs)

LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Divisions 1 Specification sections apply to this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. General electrical requirements.

B. Raceways, boxes and fittings.

C. Wire and cable.

D. Low voltage motor control.

E. Variable frequency drives.

F. Grounding.

G. Lightning protection systems.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. Surge Protection Device (SPD) is the description and equipment required for the protection of allAC electrical circuits and electronic equipment from the effects of lightning induced voltages,external switching transients and internally generated switching transients.

1.4 REFERERENCE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS

A. The latest edition of the following standards and publications shall comply to the work of thissection:

1. ANSI/IEEE C84.1-1989, American National Standard for Electric Power Systems andEquipment - Voltage Ratings (60 Hertz)

2. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002, Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage AC PowerCircuits

3. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2-2002, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges inLow-Voltage AC Power Circuits

4. ANSI/IEEE C62.45-2002, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for EquipmentConnected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits



5. Underwriters Laboratories UL 1449 Third Edition, Standard for Safety – SurgeSuppression Devices

6. Underwriters Laboratories, UL 1283, Standard for Safety - Electromagnetic InterferenceFilters

7. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 780 - National Electrical Code

8. IEEE Standard 142-1991, IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial andCommercial Power Systems (IEEE Green Book)

9. ANSI/IEEE Standard 141-1999, IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric PowerDistribution for Industrial Plants (IEEE Red Book)

10. IEEE Standard 1100-1999, IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and GroundingSensitive Electronic Equipment (IEEE Emerald Book)

11. FIPS Pub 94, Federal Information Processing Standards Publication - Guideline onElectrical Power for ADP Installations

12. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association LS-1, 1992 (NEMA LS-1)

13. MIL Standard 220A Method of Insertion-loss Measurement

14. ISO 9001:2000, Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design, Development,Production, Installation and Servicing

1.5 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS

A. All SPD devices shall comply with the construction drawings and specifications contained herein.

B. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing SPDs.

C. The Manufacturer shall submit a written statement indicating that a factory authorizedrepresentative inspected the installation. The installing Contractor shall submit a checkoutmemorandum to the Manufacturer. The memorandum shall indicate the date the equipment isplaced into service and the actual method of installation. Submit three copies to the specifyingEngineer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. The SPD and supporting components shall be guaranteed by the Manufacturer to be free ofdefects in material and workmanship for a minimum period of 10 years from the date ofsubstantial completion of service and activation of the system to which the suppressor is attached.

B. An SPD that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the warranty period shall bereplaced free of charge. Since “Acts of Nature” or similar statements typically include the threatof lightning to which the SPD’s shall be exposed, any such clause limiting warranty responsibilityin the "General Conditions" section of this specification shall not apply to this section. Thewarranty shall cover the entire device.

C. The installation of SPD’s in or on electrical distribution equipment shall in no way compromiseor violate equipment listing, labeling, or warranty of the distribution equipment.



1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. The Surge Suppression Device submittals shall include, but shall not be limited to, the followinginformation:

1. Data for each suppressor type indicating conductor sizes, conductor types and connectionconfiguration and lead lengths.

2. Manufacturer’s certified test data indicating the ability of the product to meet or exceedrequirements of this specification.

3. Suppressor Manufacturer shall provide certified test data confirming Short Circuit CurrentRating (SCCR) of the SPD(s).

4. UL 1449 clamp voltage documentation

5. Drawings, with dimensions, indicating SPD mounting arrangement and lead lengthconfiguration, and mounting arrangement of any optional remote diagnostic equipment andassemblies.

6. List and detail all protection systems such as fuses, disconnecting means and protectivematerials.

7. SPD wiring, bonding and grounding connections shall be indicated on the wiring diagramsfor each system. Include installation details demonstrating mechanical and electricalconnections to equipment to be protected.

8. If requested, a sample of each suppressor type shall be submitted for use in testing andevaluation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.0 Accepted Manufacturers

All Manufacturer’s meeting these specifications and construction drawing requirements will beacceptable.

PERFORMANCE

A. GENERAL

1. SPD’s shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 Third Edition, Standard for Safety, SurgeProtective Devices and UL 1283, Standard for Safety, Electromagnetic Interference Filters.

2. The SPD shall protect all modes:

a. A three-phase, four-wire plus ground (wye) voltage system shall have ten discretesuppression circuits: 3-modes (Line-to-Ground), 3-modes (Line-to-Line), 3-modes (Line-



to-Neutral) and 1-mode (Neutral-to-Ground). Line-to-Neutral-to-Ground is not anacceptable substitute for Line-to-Ground.

b. A three-phase, 3-wire plus ground (delta) voltage system shall have six discrete modes ofprotection: 3-modes (Line-to-Neutral) and 3-modes (Line-to-Ground).

c. A three-phase, 4-wire plus ground (high-leg delta) voltage system shall have sevendiscrete modes of protection: 3-modes (Line-to-Ground), 3-modes (Line-to-Neutral) and1-mode (Neutral-to-Ground).

3. For new switchboards and panelboards, SPD’s shall be integrally mounted inside theenclosures. For existing switchboards and panelboards, the SPD shall be mounted as close tothe circuit breaker feeding it as possible. If remote mounted, the SPD shall not affect NECcode clearance of the electrical installation.

4. SPD’s shall use a separate path to building ground; the equipment safety ground is not to beused as a transient ground path. The SPD’s grounding conductor shall be bonded to thenearest appropriate grounding point using suitable lugs or connectors.

5. SPD’s shall have a SCCR of 200kA. Fuse ratings shall not be considered in lieu ofdemonstrated withstand testing of SPD, per NEC 285.6.

6. SPD shall be UL labeled with 20kA I-nominal (I-n) (verifiable at UL.com) for compliance toUL 96A Lightning Protection Master Label and NFPA 780.

7. The SPD circuit construction of the main surge current diversion path shall be MOV (metal-oxide varistors) based. The protection status of device shall be clearly monitored on the frontpanel of the SPD enclosure.

8. Each SPD shall be provided with a protective disconnecting means in accordance with coderequirements.

a) Where SPDs are being furnished for new panels, a 30A, 3-pole circuit breaker shall beinstalled in the panelboard to serve the SPD (adjust breaker size and wire size asrequired for other vendor’s equipment). .

b) Where SPDs are being furnished for existing panels, a 30A, 3-pole circuit breakershall be installed in the panelboard to serve the SPD (adjust breaker size and wire sizeas required for other vendor’s equipment). Where there is no space in the existingpanel, provide an SPD with integral disconnect switch, and provide the necessaryhardware to connect the SPD to the panelboard bus.

9. Suppressor shall have turn-on and turn-off times of less than one nanosecond.

10. SPD’s shall be constructed using metal-oxide varistor (MOV) based suppression circuits.The SPD shall have a response time of less than one nanosecond with six inches or less ofconnected lead length for any individual protection mode.

11. The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of all components shall not be less than125% for a 120V system and 115% for 220, 240, 277, and 480V systems.

B. SERVICE ENTRANCE PROTECTION



1. Type 1 Devices: The service entrance SPD equipment shall meet or exceed the minimumperformance criteria as follows:

a. The single-impulse surge-current rating shall be a minimum of 240,000 Amperes perphase (120,000 Amperes per mode).

b. UL 1449 Third Edition Voltage Protection Rating for the following configurations shallnot exceed the following:

Voltage Configuration L-G L-N N-G120/208V 700V 700V 700V277/480V 1200V 1200V 1200V

c. The SPD's pulse life when subjected to an ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, Category (20kV-1.2/50µs, 10kA-8/20µs) waveform shall survive a minimum of 10,000 hits oroccurrences.

d. Visual indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be easily viewed on thefront panel of the enclosure. The indicator lights shall indicate suppression circuit status,phase status, phase loss and suppression fault.

e. Terminals shall be provided for all of the necessary power and ground connections. Eachterminal shall accommodate wire sizes of #10 to #1 AWG.

f. SPD's shall be provided with a set of normally-open/normally-closed Form “C” drycontacts for remote monitoring.

g. SPD's enclosure type shall be rated NEMA 4.h. SPD’s shall have a diagnostics LCD panel display providing information on phase loss

(specific to each phase), percentage of protection for each phase, surge/transient eventcount, stored cumulative surge/transient event history, technical support information andan audible alarm with a muting function.

C. DISTRIBUTION PANEL PROTECTION

1. Type 2A Devices (Type 1 is acceptable): The distribution panel SPD equipment shall meetor exceed the minimum performance criteria as follows:


b. The UL 1449 Third Edition Voltage Protection Rating for the following configurationsshall not exceed the following:

Voltage Configuration L-G L-N N-G120/208V 700V 700V 700V277/480V 1200V 1200V 1200V

c. SPD’s shall be of compact design. The mounting position of the SPD shall allow astraight and short lead-length connection between the SPD and the point of connection inthe panel board.



d. Visual indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be easily viewed on thefront panel of the enclosure. The indicator lights shall indicate suppression circuit status,phase status, phase loss, reduced protection level and suppression fault.

e. A set of normally open/normally closed Form “C” dry contacts shall be provided forremote monitoring.

f. The enclosure type shall have a NEMA 4 rating.

D. SUBPANEL PROTECTION

1. Type 2B Devices (Type 1 is acceptable): The subpanel SPD equipment shall meet or exceedthe minimum performance criteria as follows:


b. The UL 1449 Third Edition Voltage Protection Rating or the following configurationsshall not exceed the following:

Voltage Configuration L-G L-N N-G120/208V 700V 700V 700V

c. Visual indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be easily viewed on thefront panel of the enclosure.

d. A set of normally open/normally closed Form “C” dry contacts shall be provided forremote monitoring.

e. The enclosure type shall have a NEMA 4 rating.

F. POINT-OF-USE SINGLE-PHASE (120 VAC) HARD-WIRED SUPPRESSORS

1. Type 3 Devices (Type 1 is acceptable): The subpanel SPD equipment shall meet or exceedthe minimum performance criteria as follows:


b. A single-phase, two-wire plus ground voltage system shall have three discretesuppression circuits: 1-mode (Line-to-Ground), 1-mode (Line-to-Neutral) and 1-mode(Neutral-to-Ground). Line-to-Neutral-to-Ground is not an acceptable substitute for Line-to-Ground.

c. Suppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 3RD Edition, Standard for Safety,Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. The SPD's UL 1449 Third Edition VoltageProtection Rating shall not exceed 700 volts peak.

d. The SPD's pulse life when subjected to an ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, Category B3/C1 (6kV - 1.2/50 µs, 3 kA - 8/20 µs) waveform once every 30 seconds shall survive aminimum of 3000 hits or occurrences.

e. Visual indication of proper connection and operation shall be provided conveniently onthe enclosure of the SPD.

f. SPD(s) shall provide fusing in such a manner that the power to the load is not interrupted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 GENERAL

A. The contractor shall follow the SPD Manufacturer’s recommended installation practice as foundin the equipment installation instructions.

B. SPD’s shall be of compact design. The mounting position of the SPD shall allow a straight andshort lead-length connection between the SPD and the point of connection in the panelboard.

C. The installing contractor shall install the parallel SPD with short and straight conductors aspractically possible.

D. Installer may reasonably rearrange breaker locations to ensure short and straightest possible leadsto SPD’s.

E. The installation shall apply to all applicable codes.

3.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE PROTECTION

A. Install one SPD at each utility service entrance location whether indicated on the drawings or not.

B. The SPD's ground shall be bonded to the service entrance ground.

C. Neutral and ground shall be bonded together at service entrance panel locations.

3.3 DISTRIBUTION PANEL PROTECTION

A. Install one SPD at each utility distribution panel location whether indicated on the drawings ornot.

B. Neutral and ground shall not be bonded together inside any distribution panel location.

3.4 SUBPANEL PROTECTION

A. Install one SPD at each utility subpanel location where indicated on the drawings.

B. Neutral and ground shall not be bonded together inside any subpanel location.

3.4 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT AC POWER SUPPLY POINT-OF-USE (120VAC) HARD-WIREDPROTECTION

A. Install one each point-of-use (120VAC) hard-wired SPD between each equipment item and itspower supply conductors as follows:

a. Fire alarm master panelb. Intercom masterc. Building energy management system masterd. Security system mastere. Telephone system switchf. TV head end



B. Install SPD's according to Manufacturer's installation instructions.



LIGHTING 265000 - 1

SECTION 265000 - LIGHTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Provide all lighting fixtures (luminaires), lamps, end caps, connectors, fittings, structural supportmembers, supports, brackets, etc., for a complete and operable lighting system.

1.2 Prior to submitting electrical equipment brochures for review and approval, coordinate with theGeneral Contractor and verify that the fixtures are appropriate for the ceiling types in which theyare shown to be installed. Also verify that ballast voltage on the submittals is appropriate for theelectrical system on which the fixtures are to be installed (regardless of voltage listed in the partnumber in the Fixture Schedule). Submit with equipment brochures a certificate stating that theseitems of coordination have been completed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires are shown in the Luminaire Schedule on the drawings to establish a standard ofquality. Manufacturer’s names and model numbers shall not be interpreted as a proprietaryspecification. Notify the engineer at least two weeks prior to bid if an equivalent for a fixturelisted in the schedule is not readily available,

B. Provide the appropriate lamps, trim types, lenses, and accessories for proper installation inthe area shown on the drawing. Coordinate with the ceiling contractor during the creation ofshop drawings to ensure that fixtures are appropriate for the type of ceiling being installed.

2.2 LAMPS

A. Incandescent lamps shall be rated 125V and shall be of the appropriate size with theappropriate base configuration for installation in the fixture specified. Incandescent lampsshall be clear unless otherwise specified.

B. T8 fluorescent lamps shall be rapid-start with a Color Rendering Index (CRI) of 75 and acolor temperature of 3500K.

C. T5 & T5HO fluorescent lamps shall be rapid-start with a Color Rendering Index (CRI) of 82and a color temperature of 3500K.

D. HID Lamps shall be clear unless otherwise noted. They shall have a color temperature of3500K. Coordinate base size with fixture socket prior to ordering lamps.

E. LED lamps shall be LM79 and LM80 tested.

2.3 BALLASTS

A. Fluorescent luminaires shall be furnished with energy-saving, high power factor (0.9 orgreater), electronic ballasts. Ballasts shall operate lamps without noticeable flicker and shalloperate within the IES recommended noise levels. Ballasts shall operate at a frequency no


LIGHTING 265000 - 2

less than 20,000 Hz. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10%. Ballasts shall be ableto withstand voltage transients in accordance with IEEE C62.41, Category A for normal andcommon modes. Ballasts shall be compatible with the lamps furnished. Furnish number andsize of ballasts as required to operate the number of lamps indicated with the control schemesshown.

B. Fluorescent ballasts for light fixtures controlled by occupancy sensors shall be programmedstart ballasts with the lamps wired in parallel. Failure of one lamp shall leave the rest of thelamps illuminated.

C. Emergency Ballasts: Emergency Ballasts in fluorescent fixtures shall consist of an automaticpower failure device, a test switch, and a pilot light that is visible from outside of the fixture.They shall contain a fully automatic solid state charger in a self-contained power pack. Thefixture shall be factory wired in a manner that will allow the emergency lamps to be switchedwhile still maintaining charging power to the battery. Wiring Diagrams shall be furnishedwith the fixture showing switching connections. The battery shall be of the sealed electrolytetype with the capacity to provide power to the lamps provided for a minimum of 90 minutesat a minimum output as indicated below:

Linear and U-Tube T-8 and T-12 Lamps 1100 Lumens26W DTT 970 Lumens26W TRT 450 Lumens32W TRT 575 Lumens42W TRT 1000 Lumens

The battery shall be able to operate unattended with no maintenance for a period of no lessthan five years. Emergency ballasts shall be fully compatible with solid state ballasts.Battery packs shall be mounted inside the fixture unless remotely mounted ballasts are shownon the drawings, or unless the fixture is of a type that does not have room for internallymounted battery packs.

D. HID ballasts shall be of the high power factor type (0.9 or greater).

E. Where quartz restrike fixtures are fed at voltages different than 120V, they shall be furnishedwith integral transformers and all equipment necessary to feed the quartz fixtures at 120V.

2.4 SUPPORTS

A. Provide all structural members necessary to support fixtures in locations shown on thecontract drawings. Submit mounting and support details to the Architect or Engineer forapproval with the project shop drawings. Notify the General Contractor prior to bid of anystructural work that will be required to support the fixtures.

B. Provide hangers, cords, stems, etc., where required. Coordinate with the Architect orEngineer for proper stem lengths prior to ordering fixtures.

C. Support the recessed light fixtures at all four corners of the fixture.

D. Provide clips for fixtures installed in lay-in ceilings. Clips shall be equal to Erico Caddy clips# 515 or #515A.


LIGHTING 265000 - 3


3.1 Raceways for lighting systems in accessible ceilings shall be run to junction boxes mounted inlocations that do not interfere with the ceiling installation, the luminaire installation, or otherbuilding systems. Provide final connections to fixtures using conductors in flexible conduit.Flexible conduit whips shall not exceed six feet in length.

3.2 All recessed fixtures shall be mounted with their trims flush against the ceiling.

3.3 Comply completely with all manufacturers’ installation instructions.

3.4 Fixtures shall be warranted for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Incandescent lampsshall be warranted for 90 days after beneficial occupancy. Fluorescent and HID lamps shall bewarranted for 180 days after beneficial occupancy. LED lamps shall be warranted for a period oftwo years after beneficial occupancy.



OCCUPANCY SENSORS 265100 - 1

SECTION 265100 - OCCUPANCY SENSORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install a complete system of Occupancy sensors as shown on the drawings and as specifiedherein. The drawings are provided to show the general scope of the work, and show the absoluteminimum components required. Actual system components, quantities, and locations shall bedetermined by the motion detector vendor and provided to the Contractor with the installation shopdrawings.

1.2 The Contractor and Sales Representatives are advised to take notice of specified componentcharacteristics when attempting to select and propose substitutions. It is highly unlikely thatsubstitutions on a one-for-one component basis will produce results that provide acceptable systemperformance.

1.3 Provide all power packs, hardware, software, devices, circuitry, and other components, material, andlabor required to install, configure, and test the entire system to the satisfaction of the Architect, Owner,and Engineer.

1.4 Submit six sets of manufacturer’s cut sheets describing completely all equipment, and six sets of shopdrawings showing all circuitry including terminal-to-terminal connections.

1.5 The wiring diagrams on these drawings are based on our best interpretation of the Manufacturer’s datathat was available at the time of design; however, they shall not be used for system installation andconfiguration. The controls equipment vendor is expected to be thoroughly knowledgeable of theequipment that is being proposed, and shall provide detailed shop drawings tailored for each circuit andlighting zone on the project. General Manufacturer’s data sheets shall not be acceptable. The shopdrawings shall be suitable for the installing Electrician to use for complete installation of the circuitrywithout referring to data sheets or installation manuals for connection of lighting control equipment.These requirements shall be followed whether the specified equipment, or products of otherManufacturers, is provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Hallway Occupancy sensors: Occupancy sensors used in the hallways shall be passive infrared, ceiling-mounted units with a coverage of 6’ x 130’. They shall be Sensor Switch HW13 WV BR or approvedequal.

2.2 Areas up to 500 Square Feet: Occupancy sensors used in areas up to 500 square feet shall be dualtechnology infrared and microphonics, ceiling-mounted units with a 360 degree, 500 square footcoverage. They shall Sensor Switch CM PDT 9 or approved equal.

2.3 Areas up to 2000 Square Feet: Occupancy sensors used in areas up to 2000 square feet shall be dualtechnology infrared and microphonics, ceiling-mounted units with a 360 degree, 2000 square footcoverage. They shall be Sensor Switch CM PDT 10 or approved equal.

2.4 Power Packs: Power packs shall be of the same manufacturer as the occupancy sensors. Each shall becapable of controlling a 20 ampere circuit. They shall be rated for operation at the voltage of the system


OCCUPANCY SENSORS 265100 - 2

on which they will be used.

2.5 Circuitry: Provide control circuitry as required by the manufacturer for optimum system operation, butno less than the following: Control cables shall be 3-conductor #22 AWG copper with an overall jacket.Adjust conductor sizes as required to overcome unacceptable voltage drop.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Occupancy sensors shall be provided so that their coverage areas overlap and there are no dead zones inthe rooms where persons may stand and not be detected.

3.2 All work shall be done by qualified system technicians.

3.3 Wiring, including control wiring, shall be in Raceways meeting Specification 261100.

3.4 Guarantee workmanship and material for a period of one year after final acceptance. During thewarranty period, repair or replace faulty equipment at no cost to the Owner for labor, material, orexpenses.

3.5 Upon completion of job, test entire system. After testing submit a certificate to the Architect statingverification of the following:

PART 4 – CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS

4.1 Provide the following documents to the Architect for delivery to the Owner at the time of substantialcompletion:A. Written GuaranteeB. Two sets of data prepared by the manufacturer for each item of electrical equipment completely

describing each piece of equipment. The data shall include parts lists, a description of operation,shop drawings, wiring diagrams, maintenance procedures, and other literature required for operationand maintenance of equipment.

4.2 Instruct the Owner on system operational procedures. Notify the Owner and Architect at least one weekin advance of the training session. Provide written step-by-step instructional material.

4.3 Notify the General Contractor that you are to present during the Pre-final Inspection. During thatinspection, demonstrate all system functionality and capabilities; remove cover plates and panels coversas required to show the quality of the installation. The Owner, Architect, and Engineer reserve the rightto reject unsuitable workmanship or performance.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 277120 - 1

SECTION 277120 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install all components necessary to expand the existing fire alarm system (Simplex4100ES) to include the items shown on the drawings. The expanded system shall be acomplete and operable fire alarm system in accordance with the Contract drawings and asspecified herein.

B. The items added in the existing building should be added to the appropriate existing zone forthat area of the building.

C. Comply completely with the latest edition of all applicable federal, state, and local codesincluding, but not limited to the following:1) National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)2) Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)3) National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72)4) The Standard Building Code5) ANSI A17.1, “Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks”

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all enclosures, hardware, software, devices, and all other components, material, andlabor required to install, configure, and test the entire system to the satisfaction of the Engineerand all authorities.

B. All components of the system shall be manufactured by the same company. The system and itscomponents shall be approved by UL and Factory Mutual.

C. All system components shall be installed by a franchised distributor of the fire alarm systemcomponents having a repair and service department on call 24 hours a day, seven days a week.The repair and service department shall be located within 150 miles of the project.

D. Submit complete shop drawings showing all devices including mounting locations and heightsand terminal-to-terminal connections.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Provide additional battery capacity as required to operate the control panel without normal powerfor 24 hours, and then to alarm the panel continuously for at least five minutes. Submit batterysizing calculations with the manufacturer’s cut sheets and shop drawings. Any new batteriesrequired by the new equipment shall be NiCad.

2.2 All devices shall be completely compatible with the existing system.

2.3 Pull stations shall be of metallic construction. They shall be furnished with lexan shields andwarning horns.



2.4 Horns shall be rated a minimum of 85 dB at 10’.

2.5 Speakers shall be square. They shall be wall-mounted to a 4” square box. They shall produce aminimum sound level of 85dB at 10’. They shall have adjustable taps for volume level adjustment.

2.6 Strobes shall have a nominal rating of at least 75 Cd.

2.7 Smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectric type.

2.8 Combination horn-strobe and speaker-strobe units shall meet the specified requirements of theindividual horns, speakers, and strobes.

2.9 Provide duct detectors in the return duct of all air units. If a fresh air intake duct is installed, all ductdetectors shall be mounted upstream of the intake duct. For air units with flow ratings greater than15,000 CFM, provide duct detectors in both the return and supply ducts. Furnish complete withsampling tubes and duct housings.

2.10 Provide all necessary relays and circuitry, and shut down all air units upon an alarmcondition of the fire alarm system.

2.11 Provide all necessary equipment and circuitry for control of the elevator in accordance withANSI/ASME A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.

2.12 Provide all necessary relays and circuitry, and release magnetic locks upon an alarm condition ofthe fire alarm system.

2.13 Provide all necessary relays and circuitry, and release door hold-open magnets upon an alarmcondition of the fire alarm system.

2.14 Monitor all sprinkler system flow switches at the facility. Provide an alarm upon flow indication.

2.15 Monitor all sprinkler system tamper and supervisory switches at the facility. Provide a troublesignal upon tamper indication.

2.16 Conductors shall be #14 AWG copper rated THHN/THWN. Provide larger conductors whererequired to compensate for voltage drop.

2.17 All conductors shall be enclosed in raceways per Specification 261100.


3.1 All components and circuitry shall be assembled and installed per the requirements of all applicablecodes and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.2 All devices shall be mounted with their boxes flush in the walls.3.3 All outlet boxes, junction boxes, and cover plates shall be painted red.

3.4 Smoke detectors shall be mounted at least 36” away from supply vents.



3.5 All fire alarm circuitry shall be in concealed conduit up to the wiremesh cable tray. Conduit shallbe sized per the NEC, but no less than ½” EMT. Terminate all conduits at the wiremesh cable trayswith protective bushings. Utilize the wiremesh cable trays for all horizontal runs.

3.6 The Fire Alarm System Contractor shall test all system components, including each smoke detectorand duct detector prior to the pre-final inspection. All systems shall be completely operable prior tothe request for a pre-final inspection. Fire Alarm System factory-trained technicians shall bepresent at the pre-final inspection to test the system in the presence of the Owner, Architect, andEngineer.



CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM 287830- 1

SECTION 287830 - CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:

A. Provide a complete and operable system of outlet boxes and raceways for the Owner-provided CableTelevision System including, but not limited to conduits, raceways, outlet boxes, and pullwires.

B. Comply completely with all Cable Company requirements. Include all costs associated with thiscompliance in bid. Notify Architect at least ten days prior to bid if Cable Company requirements differfrom those described in the construction documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Outlet boxes shall be furnished per Specification Section 261500.

2.2 Raceways shall be furnished per Specification Section 261100. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4”nominal trade size. Provide pullstrings in all conduits.

2.3 Provide all outlets with blank, brushed stainless steel cover plates.

2.4 Terminal Board: Cable Service Equipment shall be mounted on the Telephone and Data Backboard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Extend a 3/4” conduit from each outlet box up to the wiremesh cable tray. Terminate each conduit witha protective bushing.



TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS 288000 - 1

SECTION 288000 - TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Provide complete telephone and data systems in accordance with this specification and thecontract drawings. All systems shall be furnished and installed to meet or exceed EIA/TIACategory 6 Standards.

1.2 All new wiring on this project shall conform to the EIA TIA 568A T568A or T568B scheme.Consult Owner’s IT personnel for which configuration to use. Obtain written instructions toensure that there are no misunderstandings.

1.3 Prior to ordering equipment, provide six sets of manufacturer’s cut sheets to the Architect orEngineer for the equipment to be installed. Also submit shop drawings showing the floor planwith all wiring tag identification and conduit and cable routing. Do not order any equipmentwithout receiving submittals and shop drawings that have been reviewed and approved by theEngineer.

1.4 Contractors furnishing and installing telephone and data system components shall be regularlyinvolved in furnishing and installing systems of the type specified. They shall have installed fivesystems similar in size and scope within the past six months. The Telephone and Data SystemContractor shall pull the cable as well as install all jacks and make all other system terminations.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Outlet Boxes: Provide outlet boxes in accordance with Specification 261500.

2.2 Plaster Rings: Plaster rings shall be furnished to provide single-gang openings in outlet boxesunless otherwise noted.

2.3 Raceways: Provide raceways in accordance with Specification 261100.

2.4 Jacks: Provide outlet boxes with a strap containing two data jacks, or more as indicated on thedrawings. Outlet jacks shall be 8-position, 8-conductor, RJ-45 jacks that are multivendorsupportive accepting most phone and data plugs. Jacks shall have gold-plated (50 microinchesminimum) contacts with 110 connections on the back. The jacks shall snap in the straps. Thestraps shall be colored to match the switches and receptacle color selected by the Architect underthe requirements of Specification 264600. The straps shall be covered by a stainless steel wallplateidentical to those of the receptacles and switches. Telephone outlet jacks shall be yellow; data jacksshall be blue.

2.5 Telephone and Data Cable: Telephone and Data cable shall be Category 6 rated and shall conformto or exceed the EIA/TIA 578 Commercial Building Wiring Standard, Horizontal Cable Sectionand the EIA/TIA Technical Systems Bulletin 36 for Unshielded Twisted Pair Cables. Otherstandards supported shall include IEEE 802.3, Ibase5, 10BASE-T; IEEE 802.5, 4 Mbps, 16 Mbps(328 ft/100m), 104 Workstations, proposed ANSI X3T9.5 TP-PMD requirements for UTP at 100Mbps, and 155 MB ATM. Cabling shall be UL listed. Telephone cables shall be yellow; datacables shall be blue. All Cable shall be plenum rated.


TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS 288000 - 2

2.6 Telephone and Data Backboard: The existing telephone and data backboard, existing data rack, andnew Owner furnished data rack shall be utilized for this project.

2.7 Patch Panels: Data Cables shall terminate in an Owner furnished data rack in patch panels.Provide a patch panel (or panels) containing the number of inputs required for the data cablingshown on the drawings plus 10% spare. Provide mounting brackets for patch panels as required.Provide cross-connecting cables as required to interconnect the patch panels providing the Owner asingle connection point for a connection to a server.


3.1 Provide a 1” conduit extending from each outlet box up to the wiremesh cable tray. Terminate theconduit with a protective bushing.

3.2 Route conductors from each outlet box, through the conduit and wiremesh cable tray, and to thepatch panels. Provide conduit for sleeves where cables pass through areas with hard ceilings.

3.3 Provide a minimum of two data cables to each data outlet or combination telephone/data outlet.

3.4 Provide a #1/0 copper ground wire in 1-1/4” PVC conduit from the Telephone and Data Backboardto the Building Power System Ground.

3.5 Service Conduits: the Existing service conduits shall be utilized for this project.

3.6 Uniquely identify and label all cables at each end using EIA/TIA Standards. Provide engraved orprofessionally stenciled label markings on the faceplate beside each jack.

3.7 Use a Certification Tester meeting TIA/ISO Level II or IV Accuracy requirements to prove thatcabling meets structured cabling manufacturer’s warranty requirements. The tester must providePass/Fail results compliant with TIA/ISO standards. The tester must be a Fluke DTXCableAnalyzer or approved equal. Provide documentation reports containing all measurement data(MHz, dB, NEXT, EFLEXT, RL). Test cable to ensure that it supports Category Rated NetworkSpeed and provide evidence in report. Test each cable for opens, shorts, correct pairs, crossedwiring, and proper termination approved equal. Replace any cable that is unable to pass the tests.Provide a written log of the test results of each cable to the Engineer at the prefinal inspection.Demonstrate testing of any cables selected by the Engineer.



ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 289200 - 1

SECTION 289200 - ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Provide a complete system of raceways, power, and fire alarm connections for the AccessControl system including, but not limited to conduits, raceways, receptacles, outlet boxes,circuitry, and pullwires.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Outlet boxes shall be furnished per Specification Section 261500.

2.2 Raceways shall be furnished per Specification Section 261100. Minimum conduit size shall be ¾"nominal trade size unless noted otherwise on drawings.

2.3 The Access System Control Panel, devices, and circuitry shall be provided and installed by theOwner’s vendor outside of this project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Provide a 20A toggle switch in an outlet box mounted above the ceiling at each door with amagnetic lock. Circuit the switch as shown on the construction drawings to a 120V source.

3.2 Coordinate with the Access Control System vendor for the system fire alarm connection. TheAccess System control panel shall be configured to accept a single input from the fire alarmcontrol panel to release each magnetically locked door upon an alarm condition. Provide allconduit, raceways, and relays required to release the magnetic doors upon an alarmcondition.

3.3 Provide an outlet box and conduit with pullstring to above the accessible ceiling for each cardreader, push-to-exit pushbutton, motion detector, etc. Verify the mounting height and box type withthe Access Control System vendor prior to installation.

3.4 All devices shall be mounted with their boxes flush in the walls.
